Location via proxy:   [ UP ]  
[Report a bug]   [Manage cookies]                

STA380BW STMicroelectronics

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 162

STA380BW

Sound Terminal®
2.1-channel high-efficiency digital audio system
Datasheet - production data

 Up to 12 user-programmable biquads with


noise-shaping technology
 Direct access to coefficients through I2C
shadowing mechanism
 Fixed (88.2 kHz / 96 kHz) internal processing
VQFN48 (7 x 7 mm) sampling rate
 Two independent DRCs configurable as a
dual-band anticlipper or independent
Features limiters/compressors (B2DRC)
 Digital gain/att +48 dB to -80 dB with
 Wide-range supply voltage 0.125 dB/step resolution
– 4.5 V to 26 V (operating range)
 Independent (fade-in, fade-out) soft volume
– 30 V (absolute maximum rating) update with programmable rate 48 ~ 1.5 dB/ms
 I2C control with selectable device address  Bass/treble tones control
 Embedded full IC protection  Audio presets: 15 crossover filters,
– Manufacturing short-circuit protection (out 5 anticlipping modes, nighttime listening mode
vs. gnd, out vs. vcc, out vs. out)
 STSpeakerSafeTM protection circuitry
– Thermal protection
– Pre- and post-processing DC blocking
– Overcurrent protection filters
– Undervoltage protection – Checksum engine for filter coefficients
 I2S interface, sampling rate 32 kHz ~ 192 kHz, – PWM fault self-diagnosis
with internal sampling frequency converter for
 STCompressorTM dual-band DRC
fixed processing frequency
 Three output power stage configurations Table 1. Device summary
– 2.0 mode, L/R full bridges
Order code Package Packing
– 2.1 mode, L/R two half-bridges, subwoofer
full bridge STA380BW VQFN48 Tray
– 2.1 mode, L/R full bridges, PWM output for STA380BWTR VQFN48 Tape and Reel
external subwoofer amplifier
 Driving load capabilities
– 2 x 20 W into 8  ternary modulation
– 2 x 9 W into 4 + 1 x 20 W into 8 
 FFXTM 100 dB dynamic range
 Fixed output PWM frequency at any input
sampling frequency
 Embedded RMS meter for measuring real-time
loudness
 New fully programmable noise-gating function

April 2013 DocID024543 Rev 1 1/162


This is information on a product in full production. www.st.com 162
Contents STA380BW

Contents

1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.1 Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

2 Pin connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.1 Connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.2 Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

3 Electrical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.1 Absolute maximum ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.2 Thermal data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.3 Recommended operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.4 Electrical specifications - digital section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.5 Electrical specifications - power section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.6 Power on/off sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

4 Device overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.1 Processing data path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.2 Input oversampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4.3 STCompressorTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4.3.1 STC block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4.3.2 Band splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4.3.3 Level meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4.3.4 Mapper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4.3.5 Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4.3.6 Dynamic attack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4.3.7 Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.3.8 Stereo link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.3.9 Programming of coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
4.3.10 Memory map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

5 I2C bus specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39


5.1 Communication protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
5.1.1 Data transition or change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

2/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Contents

5.1.2 Start condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39


5.1.3 Stop condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
5.1.4 Data input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
5.2 Device addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
5.3 Write operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
5.3.1 Byte write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
5.3.2 Multi-byte write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
5.4 Read operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
5.4.1 Current address byte read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
5.4.2 Current address multi-byte read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
5.4.3 Random address byte read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
5.4.4 Random address multi-byte read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
5.4.5 Write mode sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
5.4.6 Read mode sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

6 Register description: New Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42


6.1 CLK register (addr 0x00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
6.2 STATUS register (addr 0x01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
6.3 RESET register (addr 0x02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
6.4 Soft volume register (addr 0x03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
6.5 MVOL register (addr 0x04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
6.6 FINEVOL register (addr 0x05) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
6.7 CH1VOL register (addr 0x06) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
6.8 CH2VOL register (addr 0x07) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
6.9 POST scaler register (addr 0x08) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
6.10 OPER register (addr 0x09) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
6.11 FUNCT register (addr 0x0A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
6.11.1 Dual-band DRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
6.12 Configuration register A (addr 0x11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
6.12.1 Master clock select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
6.12.2 Interpolation ratio selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
6.12.3 Fault-detect recovery bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
6.13 Configuration register B (addr 0x12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
6.13.1 Serial data interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
6.13.2 Serial data first bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

DocID024543 Rev 1 3/162


Contents STA380BW

6.13.3 Delay serial clock enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61


6.13.4 Channel input mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
6.14 Configuration register C (addr 0x13) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
6.14.1 FFX compensating pulse size register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
6.15 Configuration register D (addr 0x14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
6.15.1 DSP bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
6.15.2 Post-scale link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
6.15.3 Biquad coefficient link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
6.15.4 Zero-detect mute enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
6.15.5 Submix mode enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
6.16 Configuration register E (addr 0x15) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
6.16.1 Noise-shaper bandwidth selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
6.16.2 AM mode enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
6.16.3 PWM speed mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
6.16.4 Zero-crossing enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
6.17 Configuration register F (addr 0x16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
6.17.1 Invalid input detect mute enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
6.17.2 Binary output mode clock loss detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
6.17.3 LRCK double trigger protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
6.17.4 Power-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
6.17.5 External amplifier power-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
6.18 Volume control registers (addr 0x17 - 0x1B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
6.18.1 Mute/line output configuration register (addr 0x17) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
6.18.2 Channel 3 / line output volume (addr 0x1B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
6.19 Audio preset registers (0x1D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
6.19.1 AM interference frequency switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
6.19.2 Bass management crossover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
6.20 Channel configuration registers (addr 0x1F - 0x21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
6.20.1 Tone control bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
6.20.2 EQ bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
6.20.3 Volume bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
6.20.4 Binary output enable registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
6.20.5 Limiter select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
6.20.6 Output mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
6.21 Tone control register (addr 0x22) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
6.21.1 Tone control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

4/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Contents

6.22 Dynamic control registers (addr 0x23 - 0x26 / addr 0x43 - 0x46) . . . . . . 72
6.22.1 Limiter 1 attack/release rate (L1AR addr 0x23) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
6.22.2 Limiter 1 attack/release threshold (L1ATRT addr 0x24) . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
6.22.3 Limiter 2 attack/release rate ( L2AR addr 0x25) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
6.22.4 Limiter 2 attack/release threshold ( L2 ATRT addr 0x26) . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
6.22.5 Limiter 1 extended attack threshold (addr 0x43) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
6.22.6 Limiter 1 extended release threshold (addr 0x44) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
6.22.7 Limiter 2 extended attack threshold (addr 0x45) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.22.8 Limiter 2 extended release threshold (addr 0x46) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.23 User-defined coefficient control registers (addr 0x27 - 0x37) . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.23.1 Coefficient address register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.23.2 Coefficient b1 data register bits 23:16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.23.3 Coefficient b1 data register bits 15:8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.23.4 Coefficient b1 data register bits 7:0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.23.5 Coefficient b2 data register bits 23:16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
6.23.6 Coefficient b2 data register bits 15:8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
6.23.7 Coefficient b2 data register bits 7:0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
6.23.8 Coefficient a1 data register bits 23:16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
6.23.9 Coefficient a1 data register bits 15:8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
6.23.10 Coefficient a1 data register bits 7:0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
6.23.11 Coefficient a2 data register bits 23:16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
6.23.12 Coefficient a2 data register bits 15:8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
6.23.13 Coefficient a2 data register bits 7:0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
6.23.14 Coefficient b0 data register bits 23:16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
6.23.15 Coefficient b0 data register bits 15:8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
6.23.16 Coefficient b0 data register bits 7:0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
6.23.17 Coefficient write/read control register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
6.23.18 User-defined EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
6.23.19 Pre-scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
6.23.20 Post-scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
6.24 Fault-detect recovery constant registers (addr 0x3C - 0x3D) . . . . . . . . . . 84
6.25 Extended configuration register (addr 0x47) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
6.25.1 Extended post-scale range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
6.25.2 Extended attack rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
6.25.3 Extended biquad selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
6.26 PLL configuration registers (address 0x52; 0x53; 0x54; 0x55;
0x56; 0x57) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

DocID024543 Rev 1 5/162


Contents STA380BW

6.27 Short-circuit protection mode registers SHOK (address 0x58) . . . . . . . . 88


6.28 Extended coefficient range up to -4...4 (address 0x5A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
6.29 Miscellaneous registers (address 0x5C, 0x5D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
6.29.1 Rate power-down enable (RPDNEN) bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
6.29.2 Bridge immediately off (BRIDGOFF) bit (address 0x4B, bit D5) . . . . . . 90
6.29.3 Channel PWM enable (CPWMEN) bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
6.29.4 External amplifier hardware pin enabler (LPDP, LPD LPDE) bits . . . . . 91
6.29.5 Power-down delay selector (PNDLSL[2:0]) bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
6.29.6 Short-circuit check enable bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
6.30 Bad PWM detection registers (address 0x5E, 0x5F, 0x60) . . . . . . . . . . . 92
6.31 Enhanced zero-detect mute and input level measurement
(address 0x61-0x65, 0x3F, 0x40, 0x6F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
6.32 STCompressorTM configuration register (address 0x6B; 0x6C) . . . . . . . . 95
6.33 Coefficient RAM CRC protection (address 0x71-0x7D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
6.34 MISC4 (address 0x7E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

7 Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100


7.1 Configuration register A (addr 0x00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
7.1.1 Master clock select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
7.1.2 Interpolation ratio select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
7.1.3 Fault-detect recovery bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
7.2 Configuration register B (addr 0x01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
7.2.1 Serial data interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
7.2.2 Serial audio input interface format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
7.2.3 Serial data first bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
7.2.4 Delay serial clock enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
7.2.5 Channel input mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
7.3 Configuration register C (addr 0x02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
7.3.1 FFX compensating pulse size register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
7.4 Configuration register D (addr 0x03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
7.4.1 DSP bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
7.4.2 Post-scale link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
7.4.3 Biquad coefficient link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
7.4.4 Zero-detect mute enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
7.4.5 Submix mode enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
7.5 Configuration register E (addr 0x04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

6/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Contents

7.5.1 Noise-shaper bandwidth selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111


7.5.2 AM mode enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
7.5.3 PWM speed mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
7.5.4 Zero-crossing enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
7.5.5 Soft volume update enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
7.6 Configuration register F (addr 0x05) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
7.6.1 Output configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
7.6.2 Invalid input detect mute enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
7.6.3 Binary output mode clock loss detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
7.6.4 LRCK double trigger protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
7.6.5 IC power-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
7.6.6 External amplifier power-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
7.7 Volume control registers (addr 0x06 - 0x0A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
7.7.1 Mute/line output configuration register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
7.7.2 Master volume register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
7.7.3 Channel 1 volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
7.7.4 Channel 2 volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
7.7.5 Channel 3 / line output volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
7.8 Audio preset registers (addr 0x0C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
7.8.1 Audio preset register (addr 0x0C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
7.8.2 AM interference frequency switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
7.8.3 Bass management crossover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
7.9 Channel configuration registers (addr 0x0E - 0x10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
7.9.1 Tone control bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
7.9.2 EQ bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
7.9.3 Volume bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
7.9.4 Binary output enable registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
7.9.5 Limiter select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
7.9.6 Output mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
7.10 Tone control register (addr 0x11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
7.10.1 Tone control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
7.11 Dynamic control registers (addr 0x12 - 0x15) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
7.11.1 Limiter 1 attack/release rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
7.11.2 Limiter 1 attack/release threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
7.11.3 Limiter 2 attack/release rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
7.11.4 Limiter 2 attack/release threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

DocID024543 Rev 1 7/162


Contents STA380BW

7.11.5 Limiter 1 extended attack threshold (addr 0x32) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130


7.11.6 Limiter 1 extended release threshold (addr 0x33) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
7.11.7 Limiter 2 extended attack threshold (addr 0x34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ) 131
7.11.8 Limiter 2 extended release threshold (addr 0x35) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
7.12 User-defined coefficient control registers (addr 0x16 - 0x26) . . . . . . . . . 131
7.12.1 Coefficient address register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
7.12.2 Coefficient b1 data register bits 23:16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
7.12.3 Coefficient b1 data register bits 15:8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
7.12.4 Coefficient b1 data register bits 7:0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
7.12.5 Coefficient b2 data register bits 23:16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
7.12.6 Coefficient b2 data register bits 15:8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
7.12.7 Coefficient b2 data register bits 7:0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
7.12.8 Coefficient a1 data register bits 23:16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
7.12.9 Coefficient a1 data register bits 15:8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
7.12.10 Coefficient a1 data register bits 7:0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
7.12.11 Coefficient a2 data register bits 23:16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
7.12.12 Coefficient a2 data register bits 15:8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
7.12.13 Coefficient a2 data register bits 7:0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
7.12.14 Coefficient b0 data register bits 23:16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
7.12.15 Coefficient b0 data register bits 15:8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
7.12.16 Coefficient b0 data register bits 7:0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
7.12.17 Coefficient write/read control register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
7.12.18 User-defined EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
7.12.19 Pre-scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
7.12.20 Post-scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
7.13 Fault-detect recovery constant registers (addr 0x2B - 0x2C) . . . . . . . . . 138
7.14 Device status register (addr 0x2D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
7.15 EQ coefficients configuration register (addr 0x31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
7.16 Extended configuration register (addr 0x36) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
7.16.1 Dual-band DRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
7.16.2 Extended post-scale range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
7.16.3 Extended attack rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
7.16.4 Extended BIQUAD selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
7.17 EQ soft volume configuration registers (addr 0x37 - 0x38) . . . . . . . . . . 142
7.18 Extra volume resolution configuration registers (address 0x3F; 0x40) . 143

8/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Contents

7.19 PLL configuration registers (address 0x41; 0x42; 0x43;


0x44; 0x45; 0X46) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
7.20 Short-circuit protection mode registers SHOK (address 0x47) . . . . . . . 146
7.21 Extended coefficient range up to -4...4 (address 0x49, 0x4A) . . . . . . . . 148
7.22 Miscellaneous registers (address 0x4B, 0x4C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
7.22.1 Rate power-down enable (RPDNEN) bit (address 0x4B, bit D7) . . . . . 148
7.22.2 Bridge immediately off (BRIDGOFF) bit (address 0x4B, bit D5) . . . . . 149
7.22.3 Channel PWM enable (CPWMEN) bit (address 0x4B, bit D2) . . . . . . . 149
7.22.4 External amplifier hardware pin enabler (LPDP, LPD LPDE) bits
(address 0x4C, bit D7, D6, D5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
7.22.5 Power-down delay selector (PNDLSL[2:0]) bits
(address 0x4C, bit D4, D3, D2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
7.22.6 Short-circuit check enable bit (address 0x4C, bit D0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
7.23 Bad PWM detection registers (address 0x4D, 0x4E, 0x4F) . . . . . . . . . . 151
7.24 Enhanced zero-detect mute and input level measurement
(address 0x50-0x54, 0x2E, 0x2F and 0x5E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
7.25 STCompressorTM configuration register (address 0x5A; 0x5B) . . . . . . . 154
7.26 Coefficient RAM CRC protection (address 0x60-0x6C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
7.27 MISC3 (address 0x6E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
7.28 MISC4 (address 0x7E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

8 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
8.1 Typical output configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

9 Package information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

10 Revision history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

DocID024543 Rev 1 9/162


List of tables STA380BW

List of tables

Table 1. Device summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1


Table 2. Pin list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Table 3. Absolute maximum ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Table 4. Thermal data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Table 5. Recommended operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Table 6. Electrical specifications - digital section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Table 7. Electrical specifications - power section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Table 8. Coefficients extended-range configuration 0x74h. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Table 9. Compressor ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Table 10. Conversion example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Table 11. STC coefficients memory map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Table 12. STC band splitter filters memory map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Table 13. Default register map table: NEW MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Table 14. CLK register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Table 15. STATUS register. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Table 16. RESET register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Table 17. Soft volume register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Table 18. Master volume register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Table 19. Fine volume register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Table 20. Channel 1 volume register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Table 22. Channel 2 volume register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Table 23. OPER register. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Table 24. OPER configuration selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Table 25. FUNCT register. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Table 26. Master clock select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Table 27. Input sampling rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Table 28. Internal interpolation ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Table 29. IR bit settings as a function of the input sampling rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Table 30. Fault-detect recovery bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Table 31. Serial data first bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Table 32. Support serial audio input formats for MSB-first (SAIFB = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Table 33. Supported serial audio input formats for LSB-first (SAIFB = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Table 34. Delay serial clock enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Table 35. Channel input mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Table 36. FFX compensating pulse size bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Table 37. Compensating pulse size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Table 38. DSP bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Table 39. Post-scale link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Table 40. Biquad coefficient link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Table 41. Zero-detect mute enable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Table 42. Submix mode enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Table 43. Noise-shaper bandwidth selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Table 44. AM mode enable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Table 45. PWM speed mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Table 46. Zero-crossing enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Table 47. Invalid input detect mute enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Table 48. Binary output mode clock loss detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Table 49. LRCK double trigger protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

10/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW List of tables

Table 50. IC power-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65


Table 51. External amplifier power-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Table 52. Line output configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Table 53. Mute configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Table 54. Channel 3 volume as a function of CH3VOL[7:0] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Table 55. AM interference frequency switching bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Table 56. Audio preset AM switching frequency selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Table 57. Bass management crossover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Table 58. Bass management crossover frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Table 59. Tone control bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Table 60. EQ bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Table 61. Volume bypass register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Table 62. Binary output enable registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Table 63. Channel limiter mapping as a function of C3LS bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Table 64. Channel output mapping as a function of C3OM bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Table 65. Tone control boost/cut as a function of BTC and TTC bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Table 66. Limiter attack rate as a function of LxA bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Table 67. Limiter release rate as a function of LxR bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Table 68. Limiter attack threshold as a function of LxAT bits (AC mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Table 69. Limiter release threshold as a function of LxRT bits (AC mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Table 70. Limiter attack threshold as a function of LxAT bits (DRC mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Table 71. Limiter release threshold as a function of LxRT bits (DRC mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Table 72. RAM block for biquads, mixing, scaling and bass management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Table 73. Extended post-scale range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Table 74. Extended attack rate, limiter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Table 75. Extended attack rate, limiter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Table 76. Extended biquad selector, biquad 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Table 77. Extended biquad selector, biquad 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Table 78. Extended biquad selector, biquad 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Table 79. PLL factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Table 80. PLL register 0x54 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Table 81. PLL register 0x55 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Table 82. PLL register 0x56 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Table 83. PLL register 0x57 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Table 84. Coefficients extended range configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Table 85. External amplifier enabler configuration bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Table 86. PNDLSL bits configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Table 87. Zero-detect threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Table 89. Manual threshold register 0x3F, 0x40 and 0x6F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Table 88. Zero-detect hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Table 90. Register STCCFG0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Table 91. STCCFG0 register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Table 92. Register STCCFG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Table 93. STCCFG1 register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Table 94. Misc register 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Table 95. I2C registers summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Table 96. Master clock select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Table 97. Input sampling rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Table 98. Internal interpolation ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Table 99. IR bit settings as a function of the input sampling rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Table 100. Fault-detect recovery bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Table 101. Serial audio input interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

DocID024543 Rev 1 11/162


List of tables STA380BW

Table 102. Serial data first bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105


Table 103. Support serial audio input formats for MSB-first (SAIFB = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Table 104. Supported serial audio input formats for LSB-first (SAIFB = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Table 105. Delay serial clock enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Table 106. Channel input mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Table 107. FFX compensating pulse size bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Table 108. Compensating pulse size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Table 109. DSP bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Table 110. Post-scale link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Table 111. Biquad coefficient link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Table 112. Zero-detect mute enable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Table 113. Submix mode enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Table 114. Noise-shaper bandwidth selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Table 115. AM mode enable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Table 116. PWM speed mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Table 117. Zero-crossing enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Table 118. Soft volume update enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Table 119. Output configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Table 120. Output configuration engine selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Table 121. Invalid input detect mute enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Table 122. Binary output mode clock loss detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Table 123. LRCK double trigger protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Table 124. IC power-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Table 125. External amplifier power-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Table 126. Line output configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Table 127. Mute configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Table 128. Master volume offset as a function of MVOL[7:0] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Table 129. Channel volume as a function of CxVOL[7:0] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Table 130. AM interference frequency switching bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Table 131. Audio preset AM switching frequency selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Table 132. Bass management crossover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Table 133. Bass management crossover frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Table 134. Tone control bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Table 135. EQ bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Table 136. Volume bypass register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Table 137. Binary output enable registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Table 138. Channel limiter mapping as a function of CxLS bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Table 139. Channel output mapping as a function of CxOM bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Table 140. Tone control boost/cut as a function of BTC and TTC bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Table 141. Limiter attack rate as a function of LxA bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Table 142. Limiter release rate as a function of LxR bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Table 143. Limiter attack threshold as a function of LxAT bits (AC mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Table 144. Limiter release threshold as a function of LxRT bits (AC mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Table 145. Limiter attack threshold as a function of LxAT bits (DRC mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Table 146. Limiter release threshold as a function of LxRT bits (DRC mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Table 147. RAM block for biquads, mixing, scaling and bass management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Table 148. Status register bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Table 149. Extended post-scale range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Table 150. Extended attack rate, limiter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Table 151. Extended attack rate, limiter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Table 152. Extended biquad selector, biquad 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Table 153. Extended biquad selector, biquad 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

12/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW List of tables

Table 154. Extended biquad selector, biquad 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141


Table 155. Soft volume update enable, increase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Table 156. Soft volume update enable, decrease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Table 157. Volume fine-tuning steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Table 158. Extra volume resolution enable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Table 159. PLL factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Table 160. PLL register 0x43 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Table 161. PLL register 0x44 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Table 162. PLL register 0x45 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Table 163. PLL register 0x46 bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Table 164. Coefficients extended range configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Table 165. External amplifier enabler configuration bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Table 166. PNDLSL bits configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Table 167. Zero-detect threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Table 169. Manual threshold register 0x2E, 0x2F and 0x5E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Table 168. Zero-detect hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Table 170. STCompressorTM configuration bits1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Table 171. STCompressorTM configuration bits 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Table 172. Misc register 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Table 173. MISC4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Table 174. VQFN48 (7 x 7 x 0.9 mm) package dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Table 175. Document revision history. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

DocID024543 Rev 1 13/162


List of figures STA380BW

List of figures

Figure 1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16


Figure 2. Pin connections VQFN48 (top view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Figure 3. Test circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Figure 4. Power-on sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Figure 5. Power-off sequence for pop-free turn-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Figure 6. Processing path, first part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Figure 7. Processing path, second part: 2.1 output with individually configurable anticlipper/DRCs. 26
Figure 8. Processing path, second part: 2.0 output with B2DRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Figure 9. Processing path, second part: 2.1 output configuration with STCompressorTM . . . . . . . . . 27
Figure 10. STCompressorTM block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Figure 11. Band splitter with 4th order filtering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Figure 12. STCompressorTM behavior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Figure 13. STCompressorTM behavior as a limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Figure 14. Offset effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Figure 15. Stereo link block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Figure 16. Write mode sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Figure 17. Read mode sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Figure 18. OPER = 00 (default value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Figure 19. OPER = 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Figure 20. OPER = 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Figure 21. OPER = 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Figure 22. Output mapping scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Figure 23. 2.0 channels (OPER = 00) PWM slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Figure 24. 2.1 channels (OPER = 11) PWM slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Figure 25. 2.1 channels (OPER = 10) PWM slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Figure 26. B2DRC scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Figure 27. Basic limiter and volume flow diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Figure 28. Short-circuit detection timing diagram (no short detected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Figure 29. Alternate function for INTLINE pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Figure 30. Coefficients direct access single-write operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Figure 31. Coefficients direct access multiple-write operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Figure 32. Coefficients direct access single-read operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Figure 33. OCFG = 00 (default value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Figure 34. OCFG = 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Figure 35. OCFG = 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Figure 36. OCFG = 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Figure 37. Output mapping scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Figure 38. 2.0 channels (OCFG = 00) PWM slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Figure 39. 2.1 channels (OCFG = 01) PWM slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Figure 40. 2.1 channels (OCFG = 10) PWM slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Figure 41. Basic limiter and volume flow diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Figure 42. B2DRC scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Figure 43. Extra resolution volume scheme. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Figure 44. Short-circuit detection timing diagram (no short detected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Figure 45. Alternate function for INTLINE pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Figure 46. Output configuration for stereo BTL mode in filterlight configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Figure 47. VQFN48 (7 x 7 x 0.9 mm) package outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

14/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Description

1 Description

The STA380BW is an integrated solution embedding digital audio processing, digital


amplification and FFXTM power output stage. It is part of the Sound Terminal® family and
provides full digital audio streaming from the source to the speaker, offering cost
effectiveness, low power dissipation and sound enrichment.
The STA380BW input section consists of a flexible digital input serial audio interface feeding
the digital processing unit. The serial audio data input interface supports many formats,
including the popular IIS format.
The STA380BW is based on an FFXTM (Fully Flexible Amplification) processor, proprietary
technology from STMicroelectronics. FFXTM is the evolution of the ST ternary technology:
the advanced processor is available for ternary, binary, binary differential and phase shift
PWM modulation. The STA380BW embeds the ternary, binary and binary differential
implementations, a subset of the full capability of the FFXTM processor.
The STA380BW power section consists of four independent half-bridges. These can be
configured via digital control to operate in different modes. A 2.1-channel setup can be
implemented with two half-bridges (L/R) together with a single full-bridge (subwoofer).
Alternatively, the 2.0-channel setup can be done with two full-bridges. When using this
configuration, an external amplifier for the SW channel can also be driven through the PWM
output. The STA380BW is able to deliver 2 x 20 W (ternary) into an 8  load at 18 V or
2 x 9 W (binary) into a 4  load, plus 1 x 20 W (ternary) into an 8  load at 18 V.
The STA380BW digital processing unit includes up to 12 programmable biquads (EQs),
allowing perfect sound equalization and offering advanced noise-shaping techniques.
Moreover, the coefficient range ensures a great variety of filter shapes (low/high-pass,
low/high shelf, peak, notch, band-pass). The equalization engine is fully compatible with the
ST speaker compensation technology embedded into the APWorkbench suite. A state-of-
the-art multi-band DRC, STCompressorTM equalizes the system to provide active speaker
protection with full audio quality preservation against sudden sound peaks. Moreover,
STSpeakerSafeTM technology offers reliable speaker protection under any condition. The
master clock can be from stable BICKI (64xfs, 50% duty cycle) or external XTI.

DocID024543 Rev 1 15/162


Description STA380BW

1.1 Block diagram


Figure 1. Block diagram

STA380BW

16/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Pin connections

2 Pin connections

2.1 Connection diagram


Figure 2. Pin connections VQFN48 (top view)

TEST MODE
GND_DIG2
VDD_DIG2

INT_LINE

PWRDN

RESET

LRCKI

BICKI
SDA
SCL

SDI
SA
48

47

46

45

44

43

42

41

40

39

38

37
VCC_REG 1 36 MCLK

VSS_REG 2 35 AGND_PLL

OUT2B 3 34 VREG_FILT

GND2 4 33 TWARN/FFX4A

VCC2 5 32 EAPD/FFX4B

OUT2A 6 31 FFX3B

OUT1B 7
STA380BW 30 FFX3A

VCC1 8 29 GND_DIG1

GND1 9 28 VDD_DIG1

OUT1A 10 27 GND

VDD_REG 11 26 N.C.

GND_REG 12 25 GND
13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24
GND

GND

GND

GND
N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

DocID024543 Rev 1 17/162


Pin connections STA380BW

2.2 Pin description


Table 2. Pin list
VQFN 48-pin Name Type Description

1 VCC_REG POWER VCC reg


2 VSS_REG POWER Vss reg, VCC_REG-3.3 V
3 OUT2B OUTPUT Half-bridge 2B output
4 GND2 POWER Half-bridge 2A and 2B ground
5 VCC2 POWER Half-bridge 2A and 2B supply
6 OUT2A OUTPUT Half-bridge 2A output
7 OUT1B OUTPUT Half-bridge 1B output
8 VCC1 POWER Half-bridge 1A and 1B supply
9 GND1 POWER Half-bridge 1A and 1B ground
10 OUT1A OUTPUT Half-bridge 1A output
11 VDD_REG POWER VDD reg 3.3 V
12 GND_REG POWER DC reg ground
13, 14, 15, 18, 19,
N.C. Not connected
23, 24, 26
28 VDDDIG1 POWER I/O ring power supply
29 GNDDIG1 POWER Digital core ground
30 FFX3A OUTPUT Digital PWM line out
31 FFX3B OUTPUT Digital PWM line out
32 EAPD/FFX4B OUTPUT Digital PWM line out
33 TWARN/FFX4A OUTPUT Digital PWM line out
34 VREGFILT POWER Digital VDD from core
35 AGNDPLL POWER PLL analog ground
36 MCLK INPUT PLL input clock
37 BICKI INPUT IIS serial clock
38 LRCKI INPUT IIS left/right clock
39 SDI INPUT IIS serial data input
40 RESET INPUT Reset
Device power-down
41 PWRDN INPUT 0 = power-down
1 = normal operation
42 INTLINE OUTPUT Fault interrupt
43 SDA I/O IIC serial data
44 SCL INPUT IIC serial clock
45 SA INPUT IIC select address (pull-down)

18/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Pin connections

Table 2. Pin list (continued)


VQFN 48-pin Name Type Description

46 TEST_MODE INPUT This pin must be connected to ground (pull-down)


47 GNDDIG2 POWER Digital I/O ground
48 VDDDIG2 POWER Digital core LDO supply
16, 17, 20, 22, 25, 27 GND POWER Ground

Note: To improve thermal dissipation, all the N.C. (no internal connection) pins must be connected
to GND.

DocID024543 Rev 1 19/162


Electrical specifications STA380BW

3 Electrical specifications

3.1 Absolute maximum ratings

Table 3. Absolute maximum ratings


Symbol Parameter Min Typ Max Unit

Vcc Power supply voltage (VCCxA, VCCxB) -0.3 31.5 V


VDD_DIG Digital supply voltage -0.3 4 V
Top Operating junction temperature 0 150 °C
Tstg Storage temperature -40 150 °C

Warning: Stresses beyond those listed in Table 3 above may cause


permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings
only, and functional operation of the device at these or any
other conditions beyond those indicated under
“Recommended operating conditions” are not implied.
Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for
extended periods may affect device reliability. In the real
application, power supplies with nominal values rated within
the recommended operating conditions may rise beyond the
maximum operating conditions for a short time when no or
very low current is sunk (amplifier in mute state). In this case
the reliability of the device is guaranteed, provided that the
absolute maximum ratings are not exceeded.

3.2 Thermal data


Table 4. Thermal data
Symbol Parameter Min Typ Max Unit

Rth j-case Thermal resistance junction-case (thermal pad) 1.5 °C/W


Tth-sdj Thermal shutdown junction temperature 150 °C
Tth-w Thermal warning temperature 130 °C
Tth-sdh Thermal shutdown hysteresis 20 °C

20/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Electrical specifications

3.3 Recommended operating conditions


Table 5. Recommended operating conditions
Symbol Parameter Min Typ Max Unit

Vcc Power supply voltage (VCCxA, VCCxB) 4.5 26 V


VDD_DIG Digital supply voltage 2.7 3.3 3.6 V
Tamb Ambient temperature 0 70 °C

3.4 Electrical specifications - digital section


The specifications given in this section are valid for the operating conditions:
VDD_DIG = 3.3 V, Tamb = 25 °C.

Table 6. Electrical specifications - digital section


Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit

Low level input current


Iil Vi = 0 V 0.5 μA
without pull-up/down device
High level input current Vi = VDD_DIG
Iih 0.1 μA
without pull-up/down device = 3.3 V
Vil Low level input voltage 0.8 V
Vih High level input voltage 2.0 V
Vol Low level output voltage Iol = 2 mA 0.15 V
VDD_DIG
Voh High level output voltage Ioh = 2 mA V
-0.15
Rpu Pull-up/down resistance 50 k

DocID024543 Rev 1 21/162


Electrical specifications STA380BW

3.5 Electrical specifications - power section


The specifications given in this section are valid for the operating conditions: VCC = 24 V,
f = 1 kHz, fsw = 384 kHz, Tamb = 25° C and RL = 8 , unless otherwise specified.

Table 7. Electrical specifications - power section


Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit

Output power BTL Digital limited(1) 20


(1)
Po Output power SE Digital limited 5 W
Output power SE RL = 4  Digital limited(1) 9
RdsON Power Pchannel/Nchannel MOSFET ld = 1.5 A 120 m
gP Power Pchannel RdsON matching ld = 1.5 A 95 %
gN Power Nchannel RdsON matching ld = 1.5 A 95 %
Idss Power Pchannel/Nchannel leakage 10 μA
ILDT Low current dead time (static) Resistive load(2) 8 15 ns
(2)
tr Rise time Resistive load 10 18 ns
tf Fall time Resistive load(2) 10 18 ns
Supply current from Vcc in power-down PWRDN = 0 0.1 1 μA
PCM Input signal = -60 dBfs,
Ivcc
Supply current from Vcc in operation Switching frequency = 384 kHz, 52 60 mA
No LC filters
Ilim Overcurrent limit 4 5 6.5 A
UVL Undervoltage protection 3.5 4.3 V
VOV Overvoltage protection 28.5 V
tmin Output minimum pulse width No load 20 30 60 ns
DR Dynamic range 100 dB
Signal-to-noise ratio, ternary mode A-weighted 100 dB
SNR
Signal-to-noise ratio, binary mode A-weighted 90 dB
FFX stereo mode, Po = 1 W,
THD+N Total harmonic distortion + noise 0.2 %
f = 1 kHz
FFX stereo mode,
<5 kHz, one channel driven at
XTALK Crosstalk 80 dB
1 W and other channel
measured
 Peak efficiency, FFX mode Po = 2 x 20 W into 8 90 %
1. The related THD can be defined through appropriate DRC settings (see section: 4.3: STCompressorTM)
2. Refer to Figure 3: Test circuit.

22/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Electrical specifications

Figure 3. Test circuit

DocID024543 Rev 1 23/162


Electrical specifications STA380BW

3.6 Power on/off sequence


Figure 4. Power-on sequence
Note: no specific VCC and
VDD_DIG turn−on sequence
is required

VCC

Don’t care
VDD_DIG

XTI or BICKI Don’t care

HW RESET TR TC

I2C Don’t care CMD0 CMD1 CMD2

HW PWDN

TR = minimum time between XTI master clock stable and Reset removal: 1 ms
TC = minimum time between Reset removal and I2C program, sequence start: 1ms

Note: The definition of a stable clock is when fmax - fmin < 1 MHz.
Section 6.13.1: Serial data interface gives information on setting up the I2S interface.

Figure 5. Power-off sequence for pop-free turn-off


Note: no specific VCC and
VDD_DIG turn−off sequence
is required

VCC

Don’t care

VDD_DIG

XTI or BICKI Don’t care

Soft Mute
Reg. 0x07 Don’t care FE Don’t care
Data 0xFE

Soft EAPD
Reg. 0x05
Bit 7 = 0

Note: The register addresses for Soft Mute and Soft EAPD refer to Sound Terminal compatibility
(see Section 7: Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility on page 100) and are not
the default addresses.

24/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Device overview

4 Device overview

The mentioned hyperlink in this section relates to the default New Map Section 6: Register
description: New Map.

4.1 Processing data path


The whole STA380BW processing chain is composed of two consecutive sections. In the
first one dual-channel processing is implemented (Figure 6) and then each channel is fed
into the post-mixing block allowing to generate either a third channel (typically used in 2.1
output configurations together with crossover filters) or to have the channels processed by
the dual-band DRC block (2.0 output configuration with crossover filters used to define the
cutoff frequency of the two bands).
The first section begins with a 2x oversampling FIR filter allowing 2*Fs audio processing.
Then a selectable high-pass filter removes the DC level (enabled if HFB = 0). The channel 1
and 2 processing chain can include up to 8 filters, depending on the selected configuration
(bits BQL, BQ5, BQ6, BQ7 and XO[3:0]). By default, 4 independent filters per channel are
enabled, plus the pre-configured Bass and Treble controls (BQL=0, BQ5=0, BQ6=0,
BQ7=0).
The STA380BW offers the possibility to share the filter coefficients between the two
processing channels. When this option is set (BQL=1), filters from the 1st to the 4th have
the same coeffcients set. Under these conditions, filters from the 5th to 7th can be used as
custom filters as well (provided the relevant BQx bits are set). Once again filter coefficients
are shared between the two processing channels.
Moreover the common 8th filter, from the subsequent processing section, can be available
on both channels (provided the pre-defined crossover frequencies are not used, XO[3:0]=0,
and the dual-band DRC is not used).

Figure 6. Processing path, first part

Sampling Frequency = 2xFs

X2Over- De-emph Bass Treble


Pre- Hi-Pass Biquad Biquad Biquad Biquad
-sampling
FIR
-scale Filter #1 #2 #3 #4
Or
Biquad #5
Or
Biquad #6
Or
Biquad #7
L

Userd Defined Filters Tone Control

I2S Input
Interface Sampling Frequency = Fs

X2Over- De-emph Bass Treble


Pre- Hi-Pass Biquad Biquad Biquad Biquad
-sampling
FIR
-scale Filter #1 #2 #3 #4
Or
Biquad #5
Or
Biquad #6
Or
Biquad #7
R

Sampling Frequency = 2xFs


Userd Defined Filters Tone Control

DocID024543 Rev 1 25/162


Device overview STA380BW

The second processing stage embeds a mixing block, a biquadratic/crossover filter, a DRC
stage, the volume control, a DC cut filter and a post scaler. Depending on the device
settings, the following configuration and features are available:
 2.1 output with individually configurable anticlipper/DRCs (Figure 7): two individually
configurable DRC/anticlippers are available while the eighth biquadratic filter, jointly
with the mixer block, can be used to perform LFE. This configuration and features
ensure the backward compatibility with previous Sound Terminal® products.

Figure 7. Processing path, second part: 2.1 output with individually configurable
anticlipper/DRCs

L C1Mx1 Ch an n el ½
Biq uad #8 An ti-clipper
Ch an n el 1 DC Cut
+ --------------
Hi-p ass XO
Vo lume
/
DRC
Filter
Po st Scale

R C1Mx2 Filter

C2Mx1 Ch an n el ½
Biq uad #8 An ti-clipper
Ch an n el 2 DC Cut
+ --------------
Hi-p ass XO
Vo lume
/
DRC
Filter
Po st Scale

C2Mx2 Filter

C3Mx1 Ch an n el 3
Biq uad #8 An ti-clipper
Ch an n el 3 DC Cut
+ --------------
Lo w-p ass XO
Vo lume
/
DRC
Filter
Po st Scale

C3Mx2 filter

U s er-D efined C ros sov er F requenc y


M ix C oeffic ients D eterm ined by XO Setting
(User Defin ed If
XO =0000)

26/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Device overview

 2.0 output with B2DRC (Figure 8): the mixer and the eighth biquadratic filter are used to
divide the channel into two sub-bands, then each sub-band is independently processed
by a DRC block. The two bands are then re-composed and fed to the following
processing blocks. The crossover frequency is user-selectable. This configuration and
features ensure the backward compatibility with the previous Sound Terminal®
products. For further information please refer to Chapter 6.11.1: Dual-band DRC.

Figure 8. Processing path, second part: 2.0 output with B2DRC

Channel 3
DRC 2
Volume

L C1Mx1
B2DRC
- Channel 1 DC Cut
+ Hi-pass XO
filter
+ Volume
DRC 1 + Filter
Post Scale

R C1Mx2

C2Mx1
B2DRC
Channel 2
+ Hi-pass XO
filter - + Volume
DRC 1

C2Mx2

C3Mx1
Channel 3 DC Cut
Volume
DRC 2 + Filter
Post Scale
+
C3Mx2

User-Defined Crossover Frequency


Mix Coefficients Determined by XO Setting
(User Defined If
XO=0000)

 2.1 output with STCompressorTM (Figure 9): the STA380BW embeds the latest, state-
of-the-art multi-band dynamic, range compressor, called STCompressorTM. When
using this configuration, up to 10 biquad filters are available for dedicated processing.
Please refer to Section 4.3: STCompressorTM for further information about this feature.

Figure 9. Processing path, second part: 2.1 output configuration with


STCompressorTM

L C1Mx1 Channel ½
Biquad #8 Volume
DC Cut
+ --------------
Hi-pass XO
STCompressor And
Limiter
Filter
Post Scale

R C1Mx2 Filter

C2Mx1 Channel ½
Biquad #8 Volume
DC Cut
+ --------------
Hi-pass XO
STCompressor And
Limiter
Filter
Post Scale

C2Mx2 Filter

C3Mx1 Channel 3
Biquad #8 Volume
DC Cut
+ --------------
Low-pass XO
And
Limiter
Filter
Post Scale

C3Mx2 filter

User-Defined Crossover Frequency


Mix Coefficients Determined by XO Setting
(User Defined If
XO=0000)

DocID024543 Rev 1 27/162


Device overview STA380BW

4.2 Input oversampling


Figure 6 shows the input oversampling block in front of the main processing. When 32 kHz
Fs is used, the default x2 oversampling ratio can be increased to a x3.
Activating this feature, it is possible to have a 384 kHz PWM switching frequency (instead of
the default 256 kHz) when 32 kHz Fs is used.
When bit 0 of register PLLCFG1 is set to one, the feature is activated so that the PLL ratio is
modified to generate 49.152 MHz internal clock and the audio data path (after the input
oversampling block) is running at 96 kHz.
It is not recommended to use the x3 oversampling feature when Fs > 32 kHz because of the
PLL maximum frequency constraint.

4.3 STCompressorTM
The STCompressorTM (STC from now on) is a stereo, dual-band Dynamic Range Control
(DRC) and its main purpose is to provide optimum output power level control for speaker
protection, preserving as much as possible the original audio quality of the signal.
Two main I2C registers control the STC behavior: STCCFG0 and STCCFG1. On top of the
data flow control bits, these registers also allow enabling the checksum engine to protect the
STC filters from erroneous coefficients downloads, thus improving the final application
circuitry and safety of the speakers.

28/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Device overview

4.3.1 STC block diagram

Figure 10. STCompressorTM block diagram


DRC 0

O ffset

Ban d 0
(Lo w freq s) Level
Meter
Map p er Atten uato r X
In p ut O utp ut
Ch 0 Ban d Ch 0
Sp litter Ban d 1 DRC 1 +
(Hig h freq s)
Level
Map p er Atten uato r X
Meter

O ffset

DRC 2

O ffset
Ban d 0
(Lo w freq s)
Level
Map p er Atten uato r X
In p ut Meter O utp ut
Ch 1 Ban d Ch 1
Sp litter Ban d 1 DRC 3 +
(Hig h freq s) Level
Map p er Atten uato r X
Meter

O ffset

The STC takes as input 2 channels and every channel is processed independently (i.e. an
independent DRC for each band of each channel) following the steps listed below
(Figure 10):
1. Splits the input signal into 2 bands (band splitter)
2. Measures the level of the signal (level meter)
3. Computes the attenuation (mapper)
4. Applies the attenuation and offset (attenuator)
The band splitter settings are common to both the processing channels while the settings of
the remaining blocks can be independently set for each band of each processing channel.
Caution: All the settings explained hereafter apply only to the behavior of the STCompressorTM. For
the settings concerning other device operating configurations (see Chapter 4.1: Processing
data path) please refer to the appropriate paragraphs and registers.

4.3.2 Band splitter


The band splitter block is used to divide the signal into 2 sub-bands (typically low- and high-
frequency bands). This is done through two 2nd order biquads (IIR filters) for each band,
thus allowing to have up to a 4th order filter per band. This feature guarantees a totally flat
band recombination (see Figure 11). Using different filtering orders, indeed, causes a non-
negligible gain around the filter’s cutoff frequency, endangering the overall audio fidelity and,
eventually, also the safety of the speaker. The sub-band recombination can be enabled or
disabled.

DocID024543 Rev 1 29/162


Device overview STA380BW

The band splitter filter coefficients have a user-selectable range [-1, 1), [-2, 2) and [-4, 4).
The RAM coefficient 0x7 is responsible for these settings according to Table 8. The range
default value is [-4, 4).

Table 8. Coefficients extended-range configuration 0x74h


CEXT_Bx[1] CEXT_Bx[0] Range

0 0 [-1;1)

0 1 [-2;2)

1 0 [-4;4)

1 1 Reserved

Please refer to Section 6.23: User-defined coefficient control registers (addr 0x27 - 0x37)
and to Table 12 for further details.

Figure 11. Band splitter with 4th order filtering

Band Splitter

BQ 0 BQ 1
Input
Band 0
Ch x

Output
Ch x

+ =
BQ 0 BQ 1
Band 1

4.3.3 Level meter


The level meter block measures the input signal level (in dB). Two kinds of measures are
performed: peak and RMS. The mapper configuration and the input signal automatically
determine which measurement to take into account.

4.3.4 Mapper
The mapper block computes the appropriate attenuation value (expressed in dB) to be
applied to the signal, basing its calculations on the level meter output value, on the
compressor threshold and on the limiter threshold.The attenuation value is then passed to
the attenuator block.

30/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Device overview

The STC reacts differently depending on these three parameters (Figure 12):
 level meter output value < compressor threshold < limiter threshold: under these
circumstances the signal level is small enough to not require any type of
limiting/compressing action. The signal remains unchanged.
 compressor threshold < level meter output value < limiter threshold: under these
circumstances the signal level is compressed to a ratio determined by the compressor
rate.
 compressor threshold < limiter threshold < level meter output value: under these
circumstances the signal level exceeds the limiter threshold which represents the
maximum output power allowed. The signal is limited to avoid unpredictable effects and
damages.
The compressor threshold, the limiter threshold and the compressor rate are all user-
selectable parameters. The compressor threshold range of value is [-48, 0] dB with a
0.25 dB step. The limiter threshold range of values is [-24, +12] dB with a 0.25 dB step. The
compressor ratio range of value is [0, 15], the meaning of these values is specified in
Table 9. For further details please refer to Table 11. Either setting the compressor rate to 1:1
or setting the compressor threshold greater than the limiter threshold makes the STC
behave as a pure limiter (Figure 13).

Figure 12. STCompressorTM behavior


[dB]

Linear Zone
Compression Zone
Limiting Zone

L.T.
OUTPUT

C.R.

C.T.

C.T. L.T. L.T. comp


[dB]
INPUT

DocID024543 Rev 1 31/162


Device overview STA380BW

Figure 13. STCompressorTM behavior as a limiter

[dB]
Linear Zone
Limiting Zone

L.T.

OUTPUT

L.T.
[dB]
INPUT

Table 9. Compressor ratio


Compressor ratio Ratio value

0 1:1
1 1:1.25
2 1:1.5
3 1:1.75
4 1:2
5 1:2.5
6 1:3
7 1:3.5
8 1:4
9 1:4.5
10 1:5
11 1:5.5
12 1.6
13 1:7
14 1:8
15 1:16

32/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Device overview

4.3.5 Attenuator
The attenuation is characterized by two different phases: attack and release.
Given an input signal above the limiter threshold, during the attack phase the STC
decreases the gain in order to reach the output level determined by the mapper. In this
process the key parameter is the attack rate (dB/ms) which determines how fast the STC
reacts according to the following equation:

AttackTime = OutputSignalLevel – MapperLevel


--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AttackRate

where:
 Output Signal Level is the attenuated signal coming from the attenuator block itself and
used as feedback
 Mapper Level is the target signal level to be reached
The attack rate is user-selectable and its range is [0, +16] dB/ms with a 0.25 dB/ms step.
Given an input signal moving below the limiter threshold, during the release phase the STC
increases the gain in order to return the original input signal dynamic. In this process the key
parameter is the release rate (dB/ms) which determines how fast the STC releases the
attenuation on the input signal according to the following equation:

OutputSignalLevel – MapperLevel
ReleaseTime = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ReleaseRate

The release rate is user-selectable and its range is [0.0078, 1) dB/ms with a 0.0039 dB/ms
step.

4.3.6 Dynamic attack


Due to its dynamic, the input signal may exceed the limiter threshold by a variable amount of
decibels. In such different situations it might be useful to be able to tune the attack rate to
make the STC react slower or faster depending on the context. The attack rate value, set by
the user, can be dynamically varied through the dynamic attack rate (DAR). It is a parameter
(expressed in ms/dB) acting as a weighted coefficient, multiplying the difference between
the attenuator output signal and the mapper target level. The dynamic attack rate affects the
user-programmed attack rate according to the following equations:

DynamicAttackTime =  OutputSignalLevel – MapperLevel   DAR

AttackTime = OutputSignalLevel – MapperLevel + DynamicAttackTime


--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AttackRate

 AttackRate = OutputSignalLevel – MapperLevel


--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AttackTime – DynamicAttackTime

The DAR is user-definable and its range of values is [0, +1) ms/dB, (Table 11) with a
0.0039 ms/dB step. The DAR is the same for all 4 sub-bands.

DocID024543 Rev 1 33/162


Device overview STA380BW

4.3.7 Offset
The offset is a user-selectable gain or volume control. When using the STC it is advised to
use the offset to tune the output volume instead of the regular volume controls. The offset is
located before the attenuator block, ensuring that the output power limit (limiter threshold) is
never exceeded (Figure 14). On the other side, the traditional volume control is located after
the STC attenuator, thus a wrong setting of this control could nullify the STC effect.
Each sub-band has its own and independent offset. Its range is [0, +48] dB with a 0.25 dB
step (Table 11).

Figure 14. Offset effect

4.3.8 Stereo link


The stereo link feature allows applying the same attenuation to the corresponding band of
each channel (i.e. band 0 left channel and band 0 right or band 1 left channel and band 1
right channel). This should help to prevent image shifting that could occur when individually
compressing each channel and causing a volume mismatch between left and right.
When the stereo link is active, the proper attenuation for each band is independently
computed, then the highest one for each band is applied (Figure 15).

34/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Device overview

Figure 15. Stereo link block diagram

Ch 0 – Band 0

From mapper
Attenuator Attenuator X
Ch 0 – Band 0
Max
Output
Attenuation
Band 0
+ Ch 0
From mapper
Ch 0 – Band 1
Attenuator Attenuator X

Ch 0 – Band 1

Ch 1 – Band 0

From mapper
Attenuator Attenuator X
Ch 1 – Band 0
Max
Output
Attenuation
Band 1
+ Ch 1
From mapper
Ch 1 – Band 1
Attenuator Attenuator X

Ch 1 – Band 1

4.3.9 Programming of coefficients


The coefficients are expressed in different value ranges and in decimal notation (refer to the
previous paragraphs). In order to be programmed they must be converted into a
[-1, +1) range and in hexadecimal notation (Table 10). This can be achieved with the
following procedure:
 if CoeffDecValue>0
6 23
CoeffI2CValue = rnd   CoeffDecValue  2   2 

 if CoeffDecValue<0
24 6 23
CoeffI2CValue = 2 – rnd   CoeffDecValue  2   2 

where CoeffI2CValue is the final decimal value to be converted into hexadecimal notation
while CoeffDecValue is the coefficient value (in decimal notation) to start from.

DocID024543 Rev 1 35/162


Device overview STA380BW

Table 10. Conversion example


Original value (dec) I2C value (hex)

+48.00 0x600000
+24.00 0x300000
+16.00 0x200000
+12.00 0x180000
+06.00 0x0C0000
+02.00 0x040000
+01.00 0x020000
-01.00 0xFE0000
-02.00 0xFC0000
-06.00 0xF40000
-12.00 0xE80000
-24.00 0xD00000
-48.00 0xA00000

36/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Device overview

4.3.10 Memory map


All the control parameters listed in the previous paragraphs are stored in the internal device
memory. Please refer to Table 11 and Table 12 for a complete list of their addresses.
For the programming procedure please refer to Section 6.23: User-defined coefficient
control registers (addr 0x27 - 0x37). Be aware that the read-all operation is not available for
the STC coefficients memory.

Table 11. STC coefficients memory map


Function Address Parameter Range Precision Unit Default
0x54 RR: release rate [0.0078,1) 0.0039 dB/ms 0x200000
0x55 AR: attack rate [0,16] 0.25 dB/ms 0x200000
Band 0

DRC 0

0x56 LT: limiter threshold [-24, +12] 0.25 dB 0x000000


0x57 CR: compressor ratio [0,15] 1 index 0x000000
0x58 CT: compressor threshold [-48, 0] 0.25 dB 0x000000
CH0

0x59 RR: release rate [0.0078,1) 0.0039 dB/ms 0x200000


05A AR: attack rate [0,16] 0.25 dB/ms 0x200000
Band 1

DRC 1

0x5B LT: limiter threshold [-24, +12] 0.25 dB 0x000000


0x5C CR: compressor ratio [0,15] 1 index 0x000000
0x5D CT: compressor threshold [-48, 0] 0.25 dB 0x000000

0x5E RR: release rate [0.0078,1) 0.0039 dB/ms 0x200000


0x5F AR: attack rate [0,16] 0.25 dB/ms 0x200000
Band 0

DRC 2

0x60 LT: limiter threshold [-24, +12] 0.25 dB 0x000000


0x61 CR: compressor ratio [0,15] 1 index 0x000000
0x62 CT: compressor threshold [-48, 0] 0.25 dB 0x000000
CH1

0x63 RR: release rate [0.0078,1) 0.0039 dB/ms 0x200000


0x64 AR: attack rate [0,16] 0.25 dB/ms 0x200000
Band 1

DRC 3

0x65 LT: limiter threshold [-24, +12] 0.25 dB 0x000000


0x66 CR: compressor ratio [0,15] 1 index 0x000000
0x67 CT: compressor threshold [-48, 0] 0.25 dB 0x000000

0X68 OFS0: offset DRC 0 [0, +48] 0.25 dB 0x000000


0X69 OFS1: offset DRC 1 [0, +48] 0.25 dB 0x000000
OFFSET
0X6A OFS2: offset DRC 2 [0, +48] 0.25 dB 0x000000
0X6B OFS3: offset DRC 3 [0, +48] 0.25 dB 0x000000

Dynamic attack rate 0x71 DAR: dynamic attack rate [0, 1) 0.0039 ms/dB 0x000000
CRC expected 0x72
CRC computed 0x73
Band splitter filter
Biquads CTRL 0x74 0x0000AA
coefficients range

DocID024543 Rev 1 37/162


Device overview STA380BW

Table 12. STC band splitter filters memory map


Function Address Coefficient Range Default

0x40 B1/2 [-1, 1), [-2, 2), [-4, 4) 0x000000


0x41 B2 [-1, 1), [-2, 2), [-4, 4) 0x000000

BQ0
0x42 -A1/2 [-1, 1), [-2, 2), [-4, 4) 0x000000
0x43 -A2 [-1, 1), [-2, 2), [-4, 4) 0x000000
0x44 B0/2 [-1, 1), [-2, 2), [-4, 4) 0x100000
Band 0

0x45 B1/2 [-1, 1), [-2, 2), [-4, 4) 0x000000


0x46 B2 [-1, 1), [-2, 2), [-4, 4) 0x000000
BQ1

0x47 -A1/2 [-1, 1), [-2, 2), [-4, 4) 0x000000


0x48 -A2 [-1, 1), [-2, 2), [-4, 4) 0x000000
0x49 B0/2 [-1, 1), [-2, 2), [-4, 4) 0x100000
0x4A B1/2 [-1, 1), [-2, 2), [-4, 4) 0x000000
0x4B B2 [-1, 1), [-2, 2), [-4, 4) 0x000000
BQ0

0x4C -A1/2 [-1, 1), [-2, 2), [-4, 4) 0x000000


0x4D -A2 [-1, 1), [-2, 2), [-4, 4) 0x000000
0x4E B0/2 [-1, 1), [-2, 2), [-4, 4) 0x100000
Band 1

0x4F B1/2 [-1, 1), [-2, 2), [-4, 4) 0x000000


0x50 B2 [-1, 1), [-2, 2), [-4, 4) 0x000000
BQ1

0x51 -A1/2 [-1, 1), [-2, 2), [-4, 4) 0x000000


0x52 -A2 [-1, 1), [-2, 2), [-4, 4) 0x000000
0x53 B0/2 [-1, 1), [-2, 2), [-4, 4) 0x100000

38/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW I2C bus specification

5 I2C bus specification

The STA380BW supports the I2C protocol via the input ports SCL and SDA_IN (master to
slave) and the output port SDA_OUT (slave to master). This protocol defines any device
that sends data on to the bus as a transmitter and any device that reads the data as a
receiver. The device that controls the data transfer is known as the master and the other as
the slave. The master always starts the transfer and provides the serial clock for
synchronization. The STA380BW is always a slave device in all of its communications. It
supports up to 400 kb/sec rate (fast-mode bit rate). The STA380BW I2C is a slave-only
interface. The I2C interface works properly only in the case that the master clock generated
by the PLL has a frequency 10 times higher compared to the frequency of the applied SCL
signal.

5.1 Communication protocol

5.1.1 Data transition or change


Data changes on the SDA line must only occur when the SCL clock is low. An SDA
transition while the clock is high is used to identify a START or STOP condition.

5.1.2 Start condition


START is identified by a high-to-low transition of the data bus SDA signal while the clock
signal SCL is stable in the high state. A START condition must precede any command for
data transfer.

5.1.3 Stop condition


STOP is identified by a low-to-high transition of the data bus SDA signal while the clock
signal SCL is stable in the high state. A STOP condition terminates communication between
the STA380BW and the bus master.

5.1.4 Data input


During the data input the STA380BW samples the SDA signal on the rising edge of clock
SCL. For correct device operation, the SDA signal must be stable during the rising edge of
the clock and the data can change only when the SCL line is low.

5.2 Device addressing


To start communication between the master and the STA380BW, the master must initiate
with a start condition. Following this, the master sends to the SDA line 8 bits (MSB first)
corresponding to the device select address and read or write mode.
The seven most significant bits are the device address identifiers, corresponding to the I2C
bus definition. In the STA380BW the I2C interface has two device addresses depending on
the SA port configuration, 0x38 when SA = 0, and 0x3A when SA = 1.
The eighth bit (LSB) identifies read or write operation RW, this bit is set to 1 for read mode
and to 0 for write mode. After a START condition the STA380BW identifies on the bus the

DocID024543 Rev 1 39/162


I2C bus specification STA380BW

device address and if a match is found, it acknowledges the identification on SDA bus
during the 9th bit time. The byte following the device identification byte is the internal space
address.

5.3 Write operation


Following the START condition, the master sends a device select code with the RW bit set
to 0. The STA380BW acknowledges this and then waits for the byte of the internal address.
After receiving the internal byte address the STA380BW again responds with an
acknowledgement.

5.3.1 Byte write


In the byte write mode the master sends one data byte which is acknowledged by the
STA380BW. The master then terminates the transfer by generating a STOP condition.

5.3.2 Multi-byte write


The multi-byte write mode can start from any internal address. The master generating a
STOP condition terminates the transfer.

5.4 Read operation

5.4.1 Current address byte read


Following the START condition, the master sends a device select code with the RW bit set
to 1. The STA380BW acknowledges this and then responds by sending one byte of data.
The master then terminates the transfer by generating a STOP condition.

5.4.2 Current address multi-byte read


The multi-byte read modes can start from any internal address. Sequential data bytes are
read from sequential addresses within the STA380BW. The master acknowledges each
data byte read and then generates a STOP condition, terminating the transfer.

5.4.3 Random address byte read


Following the START condition, the master sends a device select code with the RW bit set
to 0. The STA380BW acknowledges this and then the master writes the internal address
byte. After receiving the internal byte address, the STA380BW again responds with an
acknowledgement. The master then initiates another START condition and sends the device
select code with the RW bit set to 1. The STA380BW acknowledges this and then responds
by sending one byte of data. The master then terminates the transfer by generating a STOP
condition.

5.4.4 Random address multi-byte read


The multi-byte read mode can start from any internal address. Sequential data bytes are
read from sequential addresses within the STA380BW. The master acknowledges each
data byte read and then generates a STOP condition, terminating the transfer.

40/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW I2C bus specification

5.4.5 Write mode sequence

Figure 16. Write mode sequence


ACK ACK ACK
BYTE DEV-ADDR SUB-ADDR DATA IN
WRITE

START RW STOP

ACK ACK ACK ACK


MULTIBYTE DEV-ADDR SUB-ADDR DATA IN DATA IN
WRITE

START RW STOP

5.4.6 Read mode sequence

Figure 17. Read mode sequence


ACK NO ACK

CURRENT
ADDRESS DEV-ADDR DATA
READ

START RW STOP
ACK ACK ACK NO ACK
RANDOM
ADDRESS DEV-ADDR SUB-ADDR DEV-ADDR DATA
READ

START RW START RW STOP


RW= ACK ACK ACK NO ACK
HIGH
SEQUENTIAL
CURRENT DEV-ADDR DATA DATA DATA
READ

START STOP
ACK ACK ACK ACK ACK NO ACK
SEQUENTIAL
RANDOM DEV-ADDR SUB-ADDR DEV-ADDR DATA DATA DATA
READ

START RW START RW STOP

DocID024543 Rev 1 41/162


Register description: New Map STA380BW

6 Register description: New Map

Mapping of two registers is available on the STA380BW, the selection is done by setting
register 0x7E bit D7. By default, 0x7E is set to 1 and refers to a map that is not compatible
with previous Sound Terminal devices. This register’s mapping is also called “New Map”.
To keep compatibility with previous Sound Terminal devices, 0x7E bit D7 must be set to 0
after device turn-on and after any reset (via SW or via external pin). Please refer to
Section 7: Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility for all the information about
device compatibility.
Missing addresses are to be considered as reserved.

Table 13. Default register map table: NEW MAP


Addr Name D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

0x00 CLK CLK_CFG[3:0] I2S


0x01 STATUS FAULT DRCCRC EQCRC BADPWM I2SERR PLLUL
0x02 RESET SRESET
0x03 SVOL SVOL[1:0]
0x04 MVOL MVOL[7:0]
0x05 FINEVOL FINE[1:0]
0x06 CH1VOL CH1VOL[7:0]
0x07 CH2VOL CH2VOL[7:0]
0x08 POST POST[7:0]
0x09 OPER OPER[1:0]
0x0A FUNCT CRC APEQ PEQ AMDRC MDRCE DRC
0x11 CONFA FDRB IR1 IR0 MCS2 MCS1 MCS0
0x12 CONFB C2IM C1IM DSCKE SAIFB SAI3 SAI2 SAI1 SAI0
0x13 CONFC CSZ3 CSZ2 CSZ1 CSZ0
0x14 CONFD SME ZDE BQL PSL DSPB
0x15 CONFE ZCE PWMS AME NSBW
0x16 CONFF EAPD PWDN LDTE BCLE IDE
0x17 MUTELOC LOC1 LOC0 C3M C2M C1M MMUTE
0x1B CH3VOL CH3VOL[7:0]
0x1D AUTO XO3 XO2 XO1 XO0 AMAM2 AMAM1 AMAM0 AMAME
0x1F C1CFG C1BO C1VBP C1EQBP C1TCB
0x20 C2CFG C2BO C2VBP C2EQBP C2TCB
0x21 C3CFG C3OM1 C3OM0 C3LS1 C3LS0 C3BO C3VBP
0x22 TONE TTC3 TTC2 TTC1 TTC0 BTC3 BTC2 BTC1 BTC0
0x23 L1AR L1A3 L1A2 L1A1 L1A0 L1R3 L1R2 L1R1 L1R0

42/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: New Map

Table 13. Default register map table: NEW MAP (continued)


Addr Name D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

0x24 L1ATRT L1AT3 L1AT2 L1AT1 L1AT0 L1RT3 L1RT2 L1RT1 L1RT0
0x25 L2AR L2A3 L2A2 L2A1 L2A0 L2R3 L2R2 L2R1 L2R0
0x26 L2ATRT L2AT3 L2AT2 L2AT1 L2AT0 L2RT3 L2RT2 L2RT1 L2RT0
0x27 CFADDR CFA5 CFA4 CFA3 CFA2 CFA1 CFA0
0x28 B1CF1 C1B23 C1B22 C1B21 C1B20 C1B19 C1B18 C1B17 C1B16
0x29 B1CF2 C1B15 C1B14 C1B13 C1B12 C1B11 C1B10 C1B9 C1B8
0x2A B1CF3 C1B7 C1B6 C1B5 C1B4 C1B3 C1B2 C1B1 C1B0
0x2B B2CF1 C2B23 C2B22 C2B21 C2B20 C2B19 C2B18 C2B17 C2B16
0x2C B2CF2 C2B15 C2B14 C2B13 C2B12 C2B11 C2B10 C2B9 C2B8
0x2D B2CF3 C2B7 C2B6 C2B5 C2B4 C2B3 C2B2 C2B1 C2B0
0x2E A1CF1 C3B23 C3B22 C3B21 C3B20 C3B19 C3B18 C3B17 C3B16
0x2F A1CF2 C3B15 C3B14 C3B13 C3B12 C3B11 C3B10 C3B9 C3B8
0x30 A1CF3 C3B7 C3B6 C3B5 C3B4 C3B3 C3B2 C3B1 C3B0
0x31 A2CF1 C4B23 C4B22 C4B21 C4B20 C4B19 C4B18 C4B17 C4B16
0x32 A2CF2 C4B15 C4B14 C4B13 C4B12 C4B11 C4B10 C4B9 C4B8
0x33 A2CF3 C4B7 C4B6 C4B5 C4B4 C4B3 C4B2 C4B1 C4B0
0x34 B0CF1 C5B23 C5B22 C5B21 C5B20 C5B19 C5B18 C5B17 C5B16
0x35 B0CF2 C5B15 C5B14 C5B13 C5B12 C5B11 C5B10 C5B9 C5B8
0x36 B0CF3 C5B7 C5B6 C5B5 C5B4 C5B3 C5B2 C5B1 C5B0
0x37 CFUD RA R1 WA W1
0x3C FDRC1 FDRC15 FDRC14 FDRC13 FDRC12 FDRC11 FDRC10 FDRC9 FDRC8
0x3D FDRC2 FDRC7 FDRC6 FDRC5 FDRC4 FDRC3 FDRC2 FDRC1 FDRC0
0x3F MTH2 MTH[21:16]
0x40 MTH1 MTH[15:8]
0x43 EATH1 EATHEN1 EATH1[6:0]
0x44 ERTH1 ERTHEN1 ERTH1[6:0]
0x45 EATH2 EATHEN2 EATH2[6:0]
0x46 ERTH2 ERTHEN2 ERTH2[6:0]
0x47 CONFX PS48DB XAR1 XAR2 BQ5 BQ6 BQ7
0x52 PLLFRAC1 PLL_FRAC[15:8]
0x53 PLLFRAC2 PLL_FRAC[7:0]
0x54 PLLDIV PLL_DITH[1:0] PLL_NDIV[5:0]
PLL_
0x55 PLLCFG0 PLL_DPD PLL_FCT PLL_STB PLL_IDIV[3:0]
STBBYP
0x56 PLLCFG1 PLL_DIRP PLL_PWD PLL_BYP OSC_PD BOOST32K

DocID024543 Rev 1 43/162


Register description: New Map STA380BW

Table 13. Default register map table: NEW MAP (continued)


Addr Name D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

0x57 PLLSTATE BYPSTATE PDSTATE OSCOK LOWCK


0x58 SHOK GNDSH VCCSH OUTSH
0x5A CXT41 CEXT_B4[1:0] CEXT_B3[1:0] CEXT_B2[1:0] CEXT_B1[1:0]
0x5B CXT75 CEXT_B7[1:0] CEXT_B6[1:0] CEXT_B5[1:0]
0x5C MISC1 RPDNEN BRIDGOFF CPWMEN
0x5D MISC2 LPDP LPD LPDE PNDLSL[2:0] SHEN
0x5E BPTH BPTH[5:0]
0x60 BPTIM BPTIM[7:0]
0x61 ZCCFG0 WTHH WTHL FINETH HSEL[1:0] ZMTH[2:0]
0x62 ZCCFG1 RMS_CH0[7:0]
0x63 ZCCFG2 RMS_CH0[15:8]
0x64 ZCCFG3 RMS_CH1[7:0]
0x65 ZCCFG4 RMS_CH1[15:8]
NP_
0x6B STCCFG0
CRCRES
0x6C STCCFG1 STC_LNK
0x6F MTH0 MTH[7:0]
0x71 BQCHKE0 BQ_CKE[7:0]
0x72 BQCHKE1 BQ_CKE[15:8]
0x73 BQCHKE2 BQ_CKE[23:16]
0x74 XCCHKE0 XC_CKE[7:0]
0x75 XCCHKE1 XC_CKE[15:8]
0x76 XCCHKE2 XC_CKE[23:16]
0x77 BQCHKR0 BQ_CKR[7:0]
0x78 BQCHKR1 BQ_CKR[15:8]
0x79 BQCHKR2 BQ_CKR[23:16]
0x7A XCCHKR0 XC_CKR[7:0]
0x7B XCCHKR1 XC_CKR[15:8]
0x7C XCCHKR2 XC_CKR[23:16]
0x7D CHKCTRL XCAUTO BCAUTO
0x7E MISC4 SMAP WRA CH12

44/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: New Map

6.1 CLK register (addr 0x00)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
CLK_CFG[3:0] Reserved Reserved Reserved I2S
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Table 14. CLK register


Bit R/W RST Name Description

7 R/W 0 0000: 44.1/48 kHz BITCLK = 64 Fs


6 R/W 0 0001: 32 kHz BITCLK = 64 Fs
CLK_CFG[3:0] 0010: 96 kHz BITCLK = 64 Fs
5 R/W 0
0011: 48/44.1/32 kHz MCK = 256 Fs
4 R/W 0 others: clock configuration depends on IR/MCS bits
‘0’ = SAI configured in I2S mode
0 R/W 0 I2S ‘1’ = SAI configuration depends on CONFB register
status

6.2 STATUS register (addr 0x01)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
FAULT DRCCRC EQCRC BADPWM Reserved Reserved I2SERR PLLUL
NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

Table 15. STATUS register


Bit R/W RST Name Description

‘0’ = the power bridge is in fault condition


7 R FAULT(1)
‘1’ = the power bridge is in normal condition
‘0’ = normal operation
6 R DRCCRC
‘1’ = CRC error on DRC BIQUADS
‘0’ = normal operation
5 R EQCRC
‘1’ = CRC error on BIQUADS
‘0’ = normal operation
4 R BADPWM
‘1’ = PWM outputs are invalid
‘0’ = normal operation
1 R I2SERR ‘1’ = SAI interface error detected (see Section 6.13:
Configuration register B (addr 0x12))
‘0’ = PLL is locked
0 R PLLUL
‘1’ = PLL is not locked
1. Fault status is set to 1 once the power bridge goes to tri-state mode.

DocID024543 Rev 1 45/162


Register description: New Map STA380BW

6.3 RESET register (addr 0x02)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved SRESET
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Table 16. RESET register


Bit R/W RST Name Description

‘0’: normal operation


0 R/W 0 SRESET
‘1’: reset the device

After SRESET is written, the last IC acknowledge is skipped and the EAPD bit (reg 0x16 bit
D7) is set to 1 instead of the 0 default value obtained after hardware reset.

6.4 Soft volume register (addr 0x03)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved SVOL[1:0]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

Table 17. Soft volume register


Bit R/W RST Name Description

1 R/W 00: 30 ms
01: 100 ms (default)
SVOL[1:0]
0 R/W 10: 100 ms
11: Soft-mute disabled

Values are specified for fs = 48 kHz, 96 kHz or 192 kHz.

46/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: New Map

6.5 MVOL register (addr 0x04)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
MVOL[7:0]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Table 18. Master volume register


Bit R/W RST Name Description

7 R/W 0
6 R/W 0
5 R/W 0 0x00: Hard mute (immediate switchoff)
0x01: Mute
4 R/W 0
MVOL[7:0] 0x02: Mute (PWM on)
3 R/W 0 0x03: Mute (PWM on)
2 R/W 0 others: volume = [(MVOL-255)/2] dB(1)
1 R/W 0
0 R/W 0
1. If the volume is below -60 dB, the level will be approximated to 1 dB step.

6.6 FINEVOL register (addr 0x05)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved FINE[1:0]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Table 19. Fine volume register


Bit R/W RST Name Description

1 R/W 00 = 0 dB
01 = -0.125 dB
FINE[1:0]
0 R/W 10 = -0.25 dB
11 = -0.375 dB

DocID024543 Rev 1 47/162


Register description: New Map STA380BW

6.7 CH1VOL register (addr 0x06)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
CH1VOL[7:0]
1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1

Table 20. Channel 1 volume register


Table 21:
Bit R/W RST Name Description

7 R/W 1
6 R/W 0
5 R/W 0
4 R/W 1 0x00: mute
CH1VOL[7:0]
3 R/W 1 others: volume = [(CH1VOL-159)/2] dB(1)

2 R/W 1
1 R/W 1
0 R/W 1
1. If the volume is below -60 dB, the level will be approximated to 1 dB step.

6.8 CH2VOL register (addr 0x07)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
CH2VOL[7:0]
1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1

Table 22. Channel 2 volume register


Bit R/W RST Name Description

7 R/W 1
6 R/W 0
5 R/W 0
4 R/W 1 0x00: mute
CH2VOL[7:0]
3 R/W 1 others: volume = [(CH2VOL-159)/2] dB(1)

2 R/W 1
1 R/W 1
0 R/W 1
1. If the volume is below -60 dB, the level will be approximated to 1 dB step.

48/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: New Map

6.9 POST scaler register (addr 0x08)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
POST[7:0]
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Post scaler is set to POST/128 for both CH1 and CH2.

6.10 OPER register (addr 0x09)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved OPER[1:0]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Table 23. OPER register


Bit R/W RST Name Description

1 R/W 0
OPER[1:0] output configuration modes
0 R/W 0

Table 24. OPER configuration selection


OPER[1:0] Output configuration PBTL enable

2-channel (full-bridge) power, 2-channel data-out:


1A/1B  1A/1B
2A/2B  2A/2B
00 No
LineOut1  3A/3B
LineOut2  4A/4B
Line out configuration determined by LOC register
2-channel (full-bridge) power, 1-channel FFX:
1A/1B  1A/1B
11 2A/2B  2A/2B Yes
3A/3B  3A/3B
EAPDEXT and TWARNEXT Active
2(half-bridge).1(full-bridge) on-board power:
1A  1A Binary 0°
2A  1B Binary 90°
10 No
3A/3B  2A/2B Binary 45°
1A/B  3A/B Binary 0°
2A/B  4A/B Binary 90°
1 channel mono-parallel:
3A  1A/1B w/ C3BO 45°
3B  2A/2B w/ C3BO 45°
01 No
1A/1B  3A/3B
2A/2B  4A/4B
CH3 downmixed on all the PWM channels.

DocID024543 Rev 1 49/162


Register description: New Map STA380BW

Figure 18. OPER = 00 (default value)

Half OUT1A
Bridge

Channel 1
Half
Bridge OUT1B

Half OUT2A
Bridge
Channel 2

Half
Bridge OUT2B

OUT3A LineOut1
OUT3B LPF

OUT4A LineOut2
OUT4B LPF

Figure 19. OPER = 11

Half Channel 1
Bridge
OUT1A

Half Channel 2
Bridge OUT1B

Half OUT2A
Bridge
Channel 3

Half
Bridge OUT2B

Figure 20. OPER = 10


Half OUT1A
Bridge

Channel 1
Half
Bridge OUT1B

Half OUT2A
Bridge
Channel 2

Half
Bridge OUT2B

OUT3A
OUT3B
Power Channel 3
Device
EAPD

50/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: New Map

Figure 21. OPER = 01


OUT1A
Half
Bridge

Half
OUT1B
Bridge
Channel 3

Half
Bridge OUT2A

Half
Bridge OUT2B

OUT3A
Channel 1
OUT3B

OUT4A
Channel 2
OUT4B

The STA380BW can be configured to support different output configurations. For each
PWM output channel, a PWM slot is defined. A PWM slot is always 1 / (8 * fs) seconds
length. The PWM slot defines the maximum extension for the PWM rising and falling edge,
that is, the rising edge as well as the falling edge cannot range outside the PWM slot
boundaries.

Figure 22. Output mapping scheme

FFX1A
OUT1A OUT1A
FFX1 B

FFX2 A OUT1B OUT1B


FFX 2B
FFX TM
™ Power
modulator FFX3 A OUT2A Bridge OUT2A
FFX3B

FFX4 A OUT2B OUT2B


FFX 4B

REMAP
OUT3A

OUT3B

OUT4A

OUT4B

DocID024543 Rev 1 51/162


Register description: New Map STA380BW

For each configuration the PWM signals from the digital driver are mapped in different ways
to the power stage.

2.0 channels, two full-bridges (OPER = 00)


 FFX1A -> OUT1A
 FFX1B -> OUT1B
 FFX2A -> OUT2A
 FFX2B -> OUT2B
 FFX3A -> OUT3A
 FFX3B -> OUT3B
 FFX4A -> OUT4A
 FFX4B -> OUT4B
 FFX1A/1B configured as ternary
 FFX2A/2B configured as ternary
 FFX3A/3B configured as line out ternary
 FFX4A/4B configured as line out ternary
On channel 3 line out (LOC bits = 00, reg 0x17 bit D7,D6) the same data as channel 1
processing is sent. On channel 4 line out (LOC bits = 00) the same data as channel 2
processing is sent. In this configuration, neither volume control nor EQ has any effect on
channels 3 and 4.
In this configuration the PWM slot phase is the following as shown in Figure 23.

Figure 23. 2.0 channels (OPER = 00) PWM slots

OUT1A

OUT1B

OUT2A

OUT2B

OUT3A

OUT3B

OUT4A

OUT4B

52/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: New Map

2.1 channels, two half-bridges + one full-bridge (OPER = 11)


 FFX1A -> OUT1A
 FFX2A -> OUT1B
 FFX3A -> OUT2A
 FFX3B -> OUT2B
 FFX1A -> OUT3A
 FFX1B -> OUT3B
 FFX2A -> OUT4A
 FFX2B -> OUT4B
 FFX1A/1B configured as binary
 FFX2A/2B configured as binary
 FFX3A/3B configured as binary
 FFX4A/4B is not used
In this configuration, channel 3 has full control (volume, EQ, etc…). On OUT3/OUT4
channels, channel 1 and channel 2 PWM are replicated.
In this configuration the PWM slot phase is the following as shown in Figure 24.

Figure 24. 2.1 channels (OPER = 11) PWM slots

OUT1A

OUT1B

OUT2A

OUT2B

OUT3A

OUT3B

OUT4A

OUT4B

DocID024543 Rev 1 53/162


Register description: New Map STA380BW

2.1 channels, two full-bridges + one external full-bridge (OPER = 10)


 FFX1A -> OUT1A
 FFX1B -> OUT1B
 FFX2A -> OUT2A
 FFX2B -> OUT2B
 FFX3A -> OUT3A
 FFX3B -> OUT3B
 EAPD -> OUT4A
 TWARN -> OUT4B
 FFX1A/1B configured as ternary
 FFX2A/2B configured as ternary
 FFX3A/3B configured as ternary
 FFX4A/4B is not used
In this configuration, channel 3 has full control (volume, EQ, etc…). On OUT4 channel the
external bridge control signals are muxed.
In this configuration the PWM slot phase is the following as shown in Figure 25.

Figure 25. 2.1 channels (OPER = 10) PWM slots

OUT1A

OUT1B

OUT2A

OUT2B

OUT3A

OUT3B

54/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: New Map

6.11 FUNCT register (addr 0x0A)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Reserved CRC APEQ PEQ Reserved AMDRC MDRCE DRC
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

Table 25. FUNCT register


Bit R/W RST Name Description

‘0’: disable CRC computation and comparison


6 R/W 0 CRC
‘1’: enable CRC computation and comparison
‘0’: extended BQ disabled, 8th biquadratic filter disabled
5 R/W 1 APEQ
‘1’: extended BQ enabled, 8th biquadratic filter enabled
‘0’: Normal operation
4 R/W 0 PEQ
‘1’: PEQ disabled, disables all biquadratic filters
‘0’: STCompressor bypassed
2 R/W 0 AMDRC
‘1’: STCompressor enabled
‘0’: MDRCE bypassed
1 R/W 0 MDRCE
‘1’: MDRCE enabled
‘0’: DRC disabled
0 R/W 0 DRC
‘1’: DRC enabled

6.11.1 Dual-band DRC


The STA380BW device provides a dual-band DRC (B2DRC) on the left and right channels
data path, as depicted in Figure 26. Dual-band DRC is activated by setting MDRCE = 1.

Figure 26. B2DRC scheme

Channel 3
DRC 2
Volume

L
B2DRC
- Channel 1
Hi-pass XO
filter
+ Volume
DRC 1 +

B2DRC
Channel 2
R Hi-pass XO
filter - + Volume
DRC 1

Channel 3
Volume
DRC 2 +

The low-frequency information (LFE) is extracted from the left and right channels, removing
the high frequencies using a programmable biquad filter, and then computing the difference

DocID024543 Rev 1 55/162


Register description: New Map STA380BW

with the original signal. Limiter 1 (DRC1) is then used to control the amplitude of the left/right
high-frequency components, while limiter 2 (DRC2) is used to control the low-frequency
components (see Section 6.22: Dynamic control registers (addr 0x23 - 0x26 / addr 0x43 -
0x46)).
The cutoff frequency of the high-pass filters can be user-defined, XO[3:0] = 0, or selected
from the pre-defined values.
DRC1 and DRC2 are then used to independently limit L/R high frequencies and LFE
channel amplitude (see Section 6.22: Dynamic control registers (addr 0x23 - 0x26 / addr
0x43 - 0x46)) as well as their volume control. To be noted that, in this configuration, the
dedicated channel 3 volume control can actually act as a bass boost enhancer as well (0.5
dB/step resolution).
The processed LFE channel is then recombined with the L and R channels in order to
reconstruct the 2.0 output signal.

Sub-band decomposition
The sub-band decomposition for B2DRC can be configured specifying the cutoff frequency.
The cutoff frequency can be programmed in two ways, using the XO bits in register 0x0C, or
using the “user programmable” mode (coefficients stored in RAM addresses 0x28 to 0x31).
For the user-programmable mode, use the formulas below to compute the high-pass filters:

b0 = (1 + alpha) / 2 a0 = 1

b1 = -(1 + alpha) / 2 a1 = -alpha

b2 = 0 a2 = 0
where alpha = (1-sin(0))/cos(0), and 0 is the cutoff frequency.
A first-order filter is recommended to guarantee that for every 0 the corresponding
low-pass filter obtained as difference (as shown in Figure 26) will have a symmetric (relative
to the HP filter) frequency response, and the corresponding recombination after the DRC
has low ripple. Second-order filters can be used as well, but in this case the filter shape
must be carefully chosen to provide good low-pass response and minimum ripple
recombination. For second-order filters, it is not possible to give a closed formula to get the
best coefficients, but empirical adjustment should be done.

DRC settings
The DRC blocks used by B2DRC are the same as those described in Section 6.22: Dynamic
control registers (addr 0x23 - 0x26 / addr 0x43 - 0x46). B2DRC configure automatically the
DRC blocks in anticlipping mode. Attack and release thresholds can be selected using
registers 0x32, 0x33, 0x34, 0x35, while attack and release rates are configured by registers
0x12 and 0x14.

Band downmixing
The low-frequency band is down-mixed to the left and right channels at the B2DRC output.
Channel volume can be used to weight the bands recombination to fine-tune the overall
frequency response.

56/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: New Map

6.12 Configuration register A (addr 0x11)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
FDRB Reserved Reserved IR1 IR0 MCS2 MCS1 MCS0
0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1

6.12.1 Master clock select

Table 26. Master clock select


Bit R/W RST Name Description

0 R/W 1 MCS0
Selects the ratio between the input I2S sampling
1 R/W 1 MCS1
frequency and the input clock.
2 R/W 1 MCS2

The STA380BW supports sampling rates of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz,
176.4 kHz, and 192 kHz. Therefore the internal clock is:
 32.768 MHz for 32 kHz
 45.1584 MHz for 44.1 kHz, 88.2 kHz, and 176.4 kHz
 49.152 MHz for 48 kHz, 96 kHz, and 192 kHz
The external clock frequency provided to the XTI pin or BICKI pin (depending on the MCS
settings) must be a multiple of the input sampling frequency (fs).
The relationship between the input clock (either XTI or BICKI) and the input sampling rate is
determined by both the MCSx and the IR (input rate) register bits. The MCSx bits determine
the PLL factor generating the internal clock and the IR bit determines the oversampling ratio
used internally. In Table 27 MCS 111 and 110 indicate that BICKI has to be used as the
clock source, while XTI is used in all the other cases.

Table 27. Input sampling rates


Input
sampling rate IR MCS[2:0]
fs (kHz)

111 110 101 100 011 010 001 000

32, 44.1, 48 00 64*fs(*) NA 576 * fs 128 * fs 256 * fs 384 * fs 512 * fs 768 * fs


88.2, 96 01 64*fs(*) 32*fs(*) NA 64 * fs 128 * fs 192 * fs 256 * fs 384 * fs
176.4, 192 1X 64*fs(*) 32*fs(*) NA 32 * fs 64 * fs 96 * fs 128 * fs 192 * fs

Note: (*): Clock is BICKI

DocID024543 Rev 1 57/162


Register description: New Map STA380BW

6.12.2 Interpolation ratio selection

Table 28. Internal interpolation ratio


Bit R/W RST Name Description

Selects internal interpolation ratio based on input I2S


4:3 R/W 00 IR [1:0]
sampling frequency

The STA380BW has variable interpolation (oversampling) settings such that internal
processing and FFX output rates remain consistent. The first processing block interpolates
by either 3 times (Table 83: PLL register 0x56 bits D0), 2 times or 1 time (pass-through) or
provides a 2-times downsample. The oversampling ratio of this interpolation is determined
by the IR bits.

Table 29. IR bit settings as a function of the input sampling rate


Input sampling rate fs (kHz) IR 1st stage interpolation ratio

32 00 2-times oversampling
44.1 00 2-times oversampling
48 00 2-times oversampling
88.2 01 Pass-through
96 01 Pass-through
176.4 10 2-times downsampling
192 10 2-times downsampling

6.12.3 Fault-detect recovery bypass

Table 30. Fault-detect recovery bypass


Bit R/W RST Name Description

0: fault-detect recovery enabled


7 R/W 0 FDRB
1: fault-detect recovery disabled

The on-chip STA380BW power output block provides feedback to the digital controller using
inputs to the power control block. The FAULT input is used to indicate a fault condition
(either overcurrent or thermal). When FAULT is asserted (set to 0), the power control block
attempts a recovery from the fault by asserting the tri-state output (setting it to 0 which
directs the power output block to begin recovery), holds it at 0 for period of time in the range
of 0.1 ms to 1 second as defined by the fault-detect recovery constant register (FDRC
registers 0x3C-0x3D), then toggles it back to 1. This sequence is repeated as long as the
fault indication exists. This feature is enabled by default but can be bypassed by setting the
FDRB control bit to 1.

58/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: New Map

6.13 Configuration register B (addr 0x12)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C2IM C1IM DSCKE SAIFB SAI3 SAI2 SAI1 SAI0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

6.13.1 Serial data interface


The STA380BW audio serial input was designed to interface with standard digital audio
components and to accept a number of serial data formats. The STA380BW always acts as
the slave when receiving audio input from standard digital audio components. Serial data for
two channels is provided using three inputs: left/right clock LRCKI, serial clock BICKI, and
serial data 1 and 2 SDI12.
The SAI bits (D3 to D0) and the SAIFB bit (D4) are used to specify the serial data format.
The default serial data format is I2S, MSB-first. Available formats are shown in the tables
that follow.

6.13.2 Serial data first bit

Table 31. Serial data first bit


SAIFB Format

0 MSB-first
1 LSB-first

Table 32. Support serial audio input formats for MSB-first (SAIFB = 0)
BICKI SAI [3:0] SAIFB Interface format
2S
0000 0 I 15-bit data
32 * fs
0001 0 Left/right-justified 16-bit data
0000 0 I2S 16- to 23-bit data
0001 0 Left-justified 16- to 24-bit data
0010 0 Right-justified 24-bit data
48 * fs
0110 0 Right-justified 20-bit data
1010 0 Right-justified 18-bit data
1110 0 Right-justified 16-bit data
0000 0 I2S 16- to 24-bit data
0001 0 Left-justified 16- to 24-bit data
0010 0 Right-justified 24-bit data
64 * fs
0110 0 Right-justified 20-bit data
1010 0 Right-justified 18-bit data
1110 0 Right-justified 16-bit data

DocID024543 Rev 1 59/162


Register description: New Map STA380BW

Table 33. Supported serial audio input formats for LSB-first (SAIFB = 1)
BICKI SAI [3:0] SAIFB Interface format

1100 1 I2S 15-bit data


32 * fs
1110 1 Left/right-justified 16-bit data
0100 1 I2S 23-bit data
0100 1 I2S 20-bit data
1000 1 I2S 18-bit data
1100 1 LSB first I2S 16-bit data
0001 1 Left-justified 24-bit data
0101 1 Left-justified 20-bit data
48 * fs
1001 1 Left-justified 18-bit data
1101 1 Left-justified 16-bit data
0010 1 Right-justified 24-bit data
0110 1 Right-justified 20-bit data
1010 1 Right-justified 18-bit data
1110 1 Right-justified 16-bit data
0000 1 I2S 24-bit data
0100 1 I2S 20-bit data
1000 1 I2S 18-bit data
1100 1 LSB first I2S 16-bit data
0001 1 Left-justified 24-bit data
0101 1 Left-justified 20-bit data
64 * fs
1001 1 Left-justified 18-bit data
1101 1 Left-justified 16-bit data
0010 1 Right-justified 24-bit data
0110 1 Right-justified 20-bit data
1010 1 Right-justified 18-bit data
1110 1 Right-justified 16-bit data

To make the STA380BW work properly, the serial audio interface LRCKI clock must be
synchronous to the PLL output clock. It means that:
 the frequency of PLL clock / frequency of LRCKI = N ±4 cycles, where N depends on
the settings in Table 29
 the PLL must be locked.
If these two conditions are not met, and the IDE bit (reg 0x05 bit 2) is set to 1, the
STA380BW will immediately mute the I2S PCM data out (provided to the processing block)
and it will freeze any active processing task.
To avoid any audio side effects (like pop noise), it is strongly recommended to soft mute any
audio streams flowing into the STA380BW data path before the desynchronization event

60/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: New Map

happens. At the same time any processing related to the I2C configuration should be issued
only after the serial audio interface and the internal PLL are synchronous again.
Note: Any mute or volume change causes some delay in the completion of the I2C operation due
to the soft volume feature. The soft volume phase change must be finished before any clock
desynchronization.

6.13.3 Delay serial clock enable

Table 34. Delay serial clock enable


Bit R/W RST Name Description

0: No serial clock delay


5 R/W 0 DSCKE 1: Serial clock delay by 1 core clock cycle to tolerate
anomalies in some I2S master devices

6.13.4 Channel input mapping

Table 35. Channel input mapping


Bit R/W RST Name Description

0: Processing channel 1 receives left I2S input


6 R/W 0 C1IM
1: Processing channel 1 receives right I2S input
0: Processing channel 2 receives left I2S input
7 R/W 1 C2IM
1: Processing channel 2 receives right I2S input

Each channel received via I2S can be mapped to any internal processing channel via the
channel input mapping registers. This allows for flexibility in processing. The default settings
of these registers map each I2S input channel to its corresponding processing channel.

6.14 Configuration register C (addr 0x13)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Reserved Reserved CSZ3 CSZ2 CSZ1 CSZ0 Reserved Reserved
1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1

6.14.1 FFX compensating pulse size register

Table 36. FFX compensating pulse size bits


Bit R/W RST Name Description

2 R/W 1 CSZ0
3 R/W 1 CSZ1 When OM[1,0] = 11, this register determines the size
of the FFX compensating pulse from 0 clock ticks to
4 R/W 1 CSZ2 15 clock periods.
5 R/W 0 CSZ3

DocID024543 Rev 1 61/162


Register description: New Map STA380BW

Table 37. Compensating pulse size


CSZ[3:0] Compensating pulse size

0000 0 ns (0 ticks) compensating pulse size


0001 20 ns (1 tick) clock period compensating pulse size
… …
1111 300 ns (15 ticks) clock period compensating pulse size

6.15 Configuration register D (addr 0x14)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
SME ZDE Reserved BQL PSL DSPB Reserved Reserved
0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0

6.15.1 DSP bypass

Table 38. DSP bypass


Bit R/W RST Name Description

0: Normal operation
2 R/W 0 DSPB
1: Bypass of biquad and bass/treble functions

Setting the DSPB bit bypasses the EQ function of the STA380BW.

6.15.2 Post-scale link

Table 39. Post-scale link


Bit R/W RST Name Description

0: Each channel uses individual post-scale values


3 R/W 1 PSL
1: Each channel uses channel 1 post-scale values

Post-scale functionality can be used for power-supply error correction. For multi-channel
applications running off the same power supply, the post-scale values can be linked to the
value of channel 1 for ease of use and in order to update the values faster.

6.15.3 Biquad coefficient link

Table 40. Biquad coefficient link


Bit R/W RST Name Description

0: Each channel uses coefficient values


4 R/W 1 BQL
1: Each channel uses channel 1 coefficient values

For ease of use, all channels can use the biquad coefficients loaded into the channel 1
coefficient RAM space by setting the BQL bit to 1. Therefore, any EQ updates only have to
be performed once.

62/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: New Map

6.15.4 Zero-detect mute enable

Table 41. Zero-detect mute enable


Bit R/W RST Name Description

Setting of 1 enables the automatic zero-detect mute


6 R/W 0 ZDE
Setting of 0 disables the automatic zero-detect mute

Refer to 6.31: Enhanced zero-detect mute and input level measurement (address 0x61-
0x65, 0x3F, 0x40, 0x6F).

6.15.5 Submix mode enable

Table 42. Submix mode enable


Bit R/W RST Name Description

0: Submix into left/right disabled


7 R/W 0 SME
1: Submix into left/right enabled

6.16 Configuration register E (addr 0x15)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Reserved ZCE Reserved PWMS AME NSBW Reserved Reserved
1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

6.16.1 Noise-shaper bandwidth selection

Table 43. Noise-shaper bandwidth selection


Bit R/W RST Name Description

1: Third order NS
2 R/W 0 NSBW
0: Fourth order NS

6.16.2 AM mode enable

Table 44. AM mode enable


Bit R/W RST Name Description

0: Normal FFX operation


3 R/W 0 AME
1: AM reduction mode FFX operation

The STA380BW features an FFX processing mode that minimizes the amount of noise
generated in the frequency range of AM radio. This mode is intended for use when FFX is
operating in a device with an active AM tuner. The SNR of the FFX processing is reduced to
approximately 83 dB in this mode, which is still greater than the SNR of AM radio.

DocID024543 Rev 1 63/162


Register description: New Map STA380BW

6.16.3 PWM speed mode

Table 45. PWM speed mode


Bit R/W RST Name Description

0: Normal speed (384 kHz) all channels


4 R/W 0 PWMS 1: Odd speed (341.3 kHz) all channels. Not suitable for
binary BTL mode.

6.16.4 Zero-crossing enable

Table 46. Zero-crossing enable


Bit R/W RST Name Description

‘1’: Volume adjustment only occurs at digital zero-crossing


6 R/W 0 ZCE
‘0’: Volume adjustment occur immediately

The ZCE bit enables zero-crossing adjustment. When volume is adjusted on digital zero-
crossing, no clicks are audible

6.17 Configuration register F (addr 0x16)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
EAPD PWDN Reserved LDTE BCLE IDE Reserved Reserved
0 1 0 1 1 1

6.17.1 Invalid input detect mute enable

Table 47. Invalid input detect mute enable


Bit R/W RST Name Description

Setting of 1 enables the automatic invalid input


2 R/W 1 IDE
detect mute

Setting the IDE bit enables this function, which looks at the input I2S data and automatically
mutes if the signals are perceived as invalid.

6.17.2 Binary output mode clock loss detection

Table 48. Binary output mode clock loss detection


Bit R/W RST Name Description

3 R/W 1 BCLE Binary output mode clock loss detection enable

This bit detects loss of input MCLK in binary mode and will output 50% duty cycle.

64/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: New Map

6.17.3 LRCK double trigger protection

Table 49. LRCK double trigger protection


Bit R/W RST Name Description

4 R/W 1 LDTE LRCLK double trigger protection enable

This bit actively prevents double triggering of LRCLK.

6.17.4 Power-down

Table 50. IC power-down


Bit R/W RST Name Description

0: IC power-down low-power condition


7 R/W 1 PWDN
1: IC normal operation

The PWDN register is used to place the IC in a low-power state. When PWDN is written
as 0, the output begins a soft-mute. After the mute condition is reached, EAPD is asserted
to power down the power stage, then the master clock to all internal hardware except the
I2C block is gated. This places the IC in a very low power consumption state.The register
state is preserved once the device recovers from power-down.

6.17.5 External amplifier power-down

Table 51. External amplifier power-down


Bit R/W RST Name Description

0: External power stage power-down active


7 R/W 0 EAPD
1: Normal operation

The EAPD register directly disables/enables the internal power circuitry.


When EAPD = 0, the internal power section is placed in a low-power state (disabled). This
register also controls the EAPD/FFX4B output pin when OCFG = 11.

DocID024543 Rev 1 65/162


Register description: New Map STA380BW

6.18 Volume control registers (addr 0x17 - 0x1B)

6.18.1 Mute/line output configuration register (addr 0x17)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
LOC1 LOC0 Reserved Reserved C3M C2M C1M MMUTE
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Table 52. Line output configuration


LOC[1:0] Line output configuration

00 Line output fixed - no volume, no EQ


01 Line output variable - CH3 volume effects line output, no EQ
10 Line output variable with EQ - CH3 volume effects line output
11 Reserved

Line output is only active when OCFG = 00. In this case LOC determines the line output
configuration. The source of the line output is always the channel 1 and 2 inputs.

Table 53. Mute configuration


Bit R/W RST Name Description

Channel 3 mute
0 - No mute condition. It is possible to set the channel
3 R/W 0 C3M
volume
1 - Channel 3 in hardware mute
Channel 2 mute
0 - No mute condition. It is possible to set the channel
2 R/W 0 C2M
volume
1 - Channel 2 in hardware mute
Channel 1 mute
0 - No mute condition. It is possible to set the channel
1 R/W 0 C1M
volume
1 - Channel 1 in hardware mute
Master mute
0 R/W 0 MMUTE 0 - Normal operation
1 - All channels are in mute condition

66/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: New Map

6.18.2 Channel 3 / line output volume (addr 0x1B)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
CH3VOL
0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0

The volume structure of the STA380BW consists of individual volume registers for each
channel and a master volume register that provides an offset to each channel’s volume
setting. The individual channel volumes are adjustable in 0.5 dB steps from +48 dB to
-80 dB.
As an example, if CH3VOL = 0x00 or +48 dB and MVOL= -12 dB, then the total gain for
channel 3 = +36 dB.
The master mute, when set to 1, mutes all channels at once, whereas the individual channel
mute (CxM) mutes only that channel. Both the master mute and the channel mutes provide
a “soft mute” with the volume ramping down to mute in 4096 samples from the maximum
volume setting at the internal processing rate (approximately 96 kHz).
A “hard (instantaneous) mute” can be obtained by programming a value of 0xFF (255) to
any channel volume register or the master volume register. When volume offsets are
provided via the master volume register, any channel whose total volume is less than -80 dB
is muted.
All changes in volume take place at zero-crossings when ZCE = 1 (Section 6.16:
Configuration register E (addr 0x15)) on a per-channel basis as this creates the smoothest
possible volume transitions. When ZCE = 0, volume updates occur immediately.

Table 54. Channel 3 volume as a function of CH3VOL[7:0]


CH3VOL[7:0] Volume

00000000 (0x00) +48 dB


00000001 (0x01) +47.5 dB
00000010 (0x02) +47 dB
… …
01011111 (0x5F) +0.5 dB
01100000 (0x60) 0 dB
01100001 (0x61) -0.5 dB
… …
11010111 (0xD7) -59.5 dB
11011000 (0xD8) -60 dB
11011001 (0xD9) -61 dB
11011010 (0xDA) -62 dB
… …
11101100 (0xEC) -80 dB
11101101 (0xED) Hard channel mute
… …
11111111 (0xFF) Hard channel mute

DocID024543 Rev 1 67/162


Register description: New Map STA380BW

6.19 Audio preset registers (0x1D)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
XO3 XO2 XO1 XO0 AMAM2 AMAM1 AMAM0 AMAME
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

6.19.1 AM interference frequency switching

Table 55. AM interference frequency switching bits


Bit R/W RST Name Description

Audio preset AM enable


0 R/W 0 AMAME 0: switching frequency determined by PWMS setting
1: switching frequency determined by AMAM settings

Table 56. Audio preset AM switching frequency selection


AMAM[2:0] 48 kHz/96 kHz input fs 44.1 kHz/88.2 kHz input fs

000 0.535 MHz - 0.720 MHz 0.535 MHz - 0.670 MHz


001 0.721 MHz - 0.900 MHz 0.671 MHz - 0.800 MHz
010 0.901 MHz - 1.100 MHz 0.801 MHz - 1.000 MHz
011 1.101 MHz - 1.300 MHz 1.001 MHz - 1.180 MHz
100 1.301 MHz - 1.480 MHz 1.181 MHz - 1.340 MHz
101 1.481 MHz - 1.600 MHz 1.341 MHz - 1.500 MHz
110 1.601 MHz - 1.700 MHz 1.501 MHz - 1.700 MHz

6.19.2 Bass management crossover

Table 57. Bass management crossover


Bit R/W RST Name Description

4 R/W 0 XO0
Selects the bass management crossover frequency.
5 R/W 0 XO1 A 1st-order high-pass filter (channels 1 and 2) or a
6 R/W 0 XO2 2nd-order low-pass filter (channel 3) at the selected
frequency is performed.
7 R/W 0 XO3

68/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: New Map

Table 58. Bass management crossover frequency


XO[3:0] Crossover frequency

Table 73.: RAM block for biquads, mixing, scaling and bass
0000
management
0001 80 Hz
0010 100 Hz
0011 120 Hz
0100 140 Hz
0101 160 Hz
0110 180 Hz
0111 200 Hz
1000 220 Hz
1001 240 Hz
1010 260 Hz
1011 280 Hz
1100 300 Hz
1101 320 Hz
1110 340 Hz
1111 360 Hz

6.20 Channel configuration registers (addr 0x1F - 0x21)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved C1BO C1VPB C1EQBP C1TCB
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved C2BO C2VPB C2EQBP C2TCB
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C3OM1 C3OM0 C3LS1 C3LS0 C3BO C3VPB Reserved Reserved
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

6.20.1 Tone control bypass


Tone control (bass/treble) can be bypassed on a per-channel basis for channels 1 and 2.

Table 59. Tone control bypass


CxTCB Mode

0 Perform tone control on channel x - normal operation


1 Bypass tone control on channel x

DocID024543 Rev 1 69/162


Register description: New Map STA380BW

6.20.2 EQ bypass
EQ control can be bypassed on a per-channel basis for channels 1 and 2. If EQ control is
bypassed on a given channel, the prescale and all filters (biquads, bass, treble in any
combination) are bypassed for that channel.

Table 60. EQ bypass


CxEQBP Mode

0 Perform EQ on channel x - normal operation


1 Bypass EQ on channel x

6.20.3 Volume bypass


Each channel contains an individual channel volume bypass. If a particular channel has
volume bypassed via the CxVBP = 1 register, then only the channel volume setting for that
particular channel affects the volume setting, the master volume setting will not affect that
channel.

Table 61. Volume bypass register


CxVBP Mode

0 Normal volume operations


1 Volume is bypassed

6.20.4 Binary output enable registers


Each individual channel output can be set to output a binary PWM stream. In this mode
output A of a channel is considered the positive output and output B is the negative inverse.

Table 62. Binary output enable registers


CxBO Mode

0 FFX 3-state output - normal operation


1 Binary output

6.20.5 Limiter select


Limiter selection can be made on a per-channel basis according to the channel limiter select
bits. CxLS bits are not considered in case of dual-band DRC (Section 6.11.1: Dual-band
DRC), EQ DRC (Section 6.25.1: Extended post-scale range) usage.

Table 63. Channel limiter mapping as a function of C3LS bits


C3LS[1:0] Channel limiter mapping

00 Channel has limiting disabled


01 Channel is mapped to limiter #1
10 Channel is mapped to limiter #2

70/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: New Map

6.20.6 Output mapping


Output mapping can be performed on a per-channel basis according to the CxOM channel
output mapping bits. Each input into the output configuration engine can receive data from
any of the three processing channel outputs.
.

Table 64. Channel output mapping as a function of C3OM bits


C3OM[1:0] Channel x output source from

00 Channel1
01 Channel 2
10 Channel 3

6.21 Tone control register (addr 0x22)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
TTC3 TTC2 TTC1 TTC0 BTC3 BTC2 BTC1 BTC0
0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1

6.21.1 Tone control

Table 65. Tone control boost/cut as a function of BTC and TTC bits
BTC[3:0]/TTC[3:0] Boost/cut

0000 -12 dB
0001 -12 dB
… …
0111 -4 dB
0110 -2 dB
0111 0 dB
1000 +2 dB
1001 +4 dB
… …
1101 +12 dB
1110 +12 dB
1111 +12 dB

DocID024543 Rev 1 71/162


Register description: New Map STA380BW

6.22 Dynamic control registers (addr 0x23 - 0x26 / addr 0x43 -


0x46)

6.22.1 Limiter 1 attack/release rate (L1AR addr 0x23)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
L1A3 L1A2 L1A1 L1A0 L1R3 L1R2 L1R1 L1R0
0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0

6.22.2 Limiter 1 attack/release threshold (L1ATRT addr 0x24)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
L1AT3 L1AT2 L1AT1 L1AT0 L1RT3 L1RT2 L1RT1 L1RT0
0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1

6.22.3 Limiter 2 attack/release rate ( L2AR addr 0x25)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
L2A3 L2A2 L2A1 L2A0 L2R3 L2R2 L2R1 L2R0
0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0

6.22.4 Limiter 2 attack/release threshold ( L2 ATRT addr 0x26)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
L2AT3 L2AT2 L2AT1 L2AT0 L2RT3 L2RT2 L2RT1 L2RT0
0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1

The STA380BW includes two independent limiter blocks. The purpose of the limiters is to
automatically reduce the dynamic range of a recording to prevent the outputs from clipping
in anticlipping mode or to actively reduce the dynamic range for a better listening
environment such as a nighttime listening mode which is often needed for DVDs. The two
modes are selected via the DRC bit in Section 6.11: FUNCT register (addr 0x0A). Each
channel can be mapped to either limiter or not mapped, meaning that the channel will clip
when 0 dBfs is exceeded. Each limiter looks at the present value of each channel that is
mapped to it, selects the maximum absolute value of all these channels, performs the
limiting algorithm on that value, and then, if needed, adjusts the gain of the mapped
channels in unison.
The limiter attack thresholds are determined by the LxAT registers if the EATHx[7] (bit D7 of
register 0x43 or 0x45) bits are set to 0, else the thresholds are determined by EATHx[6:0]. It
is recommended in anticlipping mode to set this to 0 dBfs, which corresponds to the
maximum unclipped output power of an FFX amplifier. Since gain can be added digitally
within the STA380BW it is possible to exceed 0 dBfs or any other LxAT setting. When this
occurs, the limiter, when active, automatically starts reducing the gain. The rate at which the
gain is reduced when the attack threshold is exceeded is dependent upon the attack rate
register setting for that limiter. Gain reduction occurs on a peak-detect algorithm. Setting the
EATHx[7] bits to 1 selects the anticlipping mode.
The limiter release thresholds are determined by the LxRT registers if the ERTHx[7] (bit D7
of register 0x44 or 0x46) bits are set to 0, else the thresholds are determined by

72/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: New Map

ERTHx[6:0]. Setting the ERTHx[7] bits to 1 automatically selects the anticlipping mode. The
release of the limiter, when the gain is again increased, is dependent on an RMS-detect
algorithm. The output of the volume/limiter block is passed through an RMS filter. The output
of this filter is compared to the release threshold, determined by the release threshold
register. When the RMS filter output falls below the release threshold, the gain is again
increased at a rate dependent upon the release rate register. The gain can never be
increased past its set value and, therefore, the release only occurs if the limiter has already
reduced the gain. The release threshold value can be used to set what is effectively a
minimum dynamic range, this is helpful as overlimiting can reduce the dynamic range to
virtually zero and cause program material to sound “lifeless”.
In anticlipping mode, the attack and release thresholds are set relative to full-scale. In DRC
mode (bit D0 reg 0x0A set to 1), the attack threshold is set relative to the maximum volume
setting of the channels mapped to that limiter and the release threshold is set relative to the
maximum volume setting plus the attack threshold.

DocID024543 Rev 1 73/162


Register description: New Map STA380BW

Figure 27. Basic limiter and volume flow diagram

RMS
Limiter

Gain / Vo lume
+

In p ut Outp ut
Gain Atten uatio n Saturatio n

Table 66. Limiter attack rate as a Table 67. Limiter release rate as a
function of LxA bits function of LxR bits
LxA[3:0] Attack rate dB/ms LxR[3:0] Release rate dB/ms

0000 3.1584 0000 0.5116


Fast Fast
0001 2.7072 0001 0.1370
0010 2.2560 0010 0.0744
0011 1.8048 0011 0.0499
0100 1.3536 0100 0.0360
0101 0.9024 0101 0.0299
0110 0.4512 0110 0.0264
0111 0.2256 0111 0.0208
1000 0.1504 1000 0.0198
1001 0.1123 1001 0.0172
1010 0.0902 1010 0.0147
1011 0.0752 1011 0.0137
1100 0.0645 1100 0.0134
1101 0.0564 1101 0.0117
1110 0.0501 1110 0.0110
Slow Slow
1111 0.0451 1111 0.0104

74/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: New Map

Anticlipping mode

Table 68. Limiter attack threshold as a Table 69. Limiter release threshold as a
function of LxAT bits (AC mode) function of LxRT bits (AC mode)
LxAT[3:0] AC (dB relative to fs) LxRT[3:0] AC (dB relative to fs)

0000 -12 0000 -


0001 -10 0001 -29 dB
0010 -8 0010 -20 dB
0011 -6 0011 -16 dB
0100 -4 0100 -14 dB
0101 -2 0101 -12 dB
0110 0 0110 -10 dB
0111 +2 0111 -8 dB
1000 +3 1000 -7 dB
1001 +4 1001 -6 dB
1010 +5 1010 -5 dB
1011 +6 1011 -4 dB
1100 +7 1100 -3 dB
1101 +8 1101 -2 dB
1110 +9 1110 -1 dB
1111 +10 1111 -0 dB

DocID024543 Rev 1 75/162


Register description: New Map STA380BW

Dynamic range compression mode

Table 70. Limiter attack threshold as Table 71. Limiter release threshold as
a function of LxAT bits (DRC mode) a function of LxRT bits (DRC mode)
DRC (dB relative to volume +
LxAT[3:0] DRC (dB relative to volume) LxRT[3:0]
LxAT)

0000 -31 0000 -


0001 -29 0001 -38 dB
0010 -27 0010 -36 dB
0011 -25 0011 -33 dB
0100 -23 0100 -31 dB
0101 -21 0101 -30 dB
0110 -19 0110 -28 dB
0111 -17 0111 -26 dB
1000 -16 1000 -24 dB
1001 -15 1001 -22 dB
1010 -14 1010 -20 dB
1011 -13 1011 -18 dB
1100 -12 1100 -15 dB
1101 -10 1101 -12 dB
1110 -7 1110 -9 dB
1111 -4 1111 -6 dB

6.22.5 Limiter 1 extended attack threshold (addr 0x43)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
EATHEN1 EATH1[6] EATH1[5] EATH1[4] EATH1[3] EATH1[2] EATH1[1] EATH1[0]
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

The extended attack threshold value is determined as follows:


attack threshold = -12 + EATH1 / 4
To enable this feature, the EATHEN1 bit must be set to 1.

6.22.6 Limiter 1 extended release threshold (addr 0x44)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
ERTHEN1 ERTH1[6] ERTH1[5] ERTH1[4] ERTH1[3] ERTH1[2] ERTH1[1] ERTH1[0]
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

The extended release threshold value is determined as follows:


release threshold = -12 + ERTH1 / 4
To enable this feature, the ERTHEN1 bit must be set to 1.

76/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: New Map

6.22.7 Limiter 2 extended attack threshold (addr 0x45)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
EATHEN2 EATH2[6] EATH2[5] EATH2[4] EATH2[3] EATH2[2] EATH2[1] EATH2[0]
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

The extended attack threshold value is determined as follows:


attack threshold = -12 + EATH2 / 4
To enable this feature, the EATHEN2 bit must be set to 1.

6.22.8 Limiter 2 extended release threshold (addr 0x46)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
ERTHEN2 ERTH2[6] ERTH2[5] ERTH2[4] ERTH2[3] ERTH2[2] ERTH2[1] ERTH2[0]
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

The extended release threshold value is determined as follows:


release threshold = -12 + ERTH2 / 4
To enable this feature, the ERTHEN2 bit must be set to 1.
Note: Attack/release threshold step is 0.125 dB in the range -12 dB to 0 dB.

6.23 User-defined coefficient control registers (addr 0x27 - 0x37)

6.23.1 Coefficient address register

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Reserved Reserved CFA5 CFA4 CFA3 CFA2 CFA1 CFA0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

6.23.2 Coefficient b1 data register bits 23:16

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C1B23 C1B22 C1B21 C1B20 C1B19 C1B18 C1B17 C1B16
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

6.23.3 Coefficient b1 data register bits 15:8

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C1B15 C1B14 C1B13 C1B12 C1B11 C1B10 C1B9 C1B8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

6.23.4 Coefficient b1 data register bits 7:0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C1B7 C1B6 C1B5 C1B4 C1B3 C1B2 C1B1 C1B0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

DocID024543 Rev 1 77/162


Register description: New Map STA380BW

6.23.5 Coefficient b2 data register bits 23:16

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C2B23 C2B22 C2B21 C2B20 C2B19 C2B18 C2B17 C2B16
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

6.23.6 Coefficient b2 data register bits 15:8

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C2B15 C2B14 C2B13 C2B12 C2B11 C2B10 C2B9 C2B8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

6.23.7 Coefficient b2 data register bits 7:0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C2B7 C2B6 C2B5 C2B4 C2B3 C2B2 C2B1 C2B0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

6.23.8 Coefficient a1 data register bits 23:16

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C1B23 C1B22 C1B21 C1B20 C1B19 C1B18 C1B17 C1B16
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

6.23.9 Coefficient a1 data register bits 15:8

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C3B15 C3B14 C3B13 C3B12 C3B11 C3B10 C3B9 C3B8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

6.23.10 Coefficient a1 data register bits 7:0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C3B7 C3B6 C3B5 C3B4 C3B3 C3B2 C3B1 C3B0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

6.23.11 Coefficient a2 data register bits 23:16

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C4B23 C4B22 C4B21 C4B20 C4B19 C4B18 C4B17 C4B16
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

78/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: New Map

6.23.12 Coefficient a2 data register bits 15:8

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C4B15 C4B14 C4B13 C4B12 C4B11 C4B10 C4B9 C4B8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

6.23.13 Coefficient a2 data register bits 7:0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C4B7 C4B6 C4B5 C4B4 C4B3 C4B2 C4B1 C4B0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

6.23.14 Coefficient b0 data register bits 23:16

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C5B23 C5B22 C5B21 C5B20 C5B19 C5B18 C5B17 C5B16
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

6.23.15 Coefficient b0 data register bits 15:8

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C5B15 C5B14 C5B13 C5B12 C5B11 C5B10 C5B9 C5B8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

6.23.16 Coefficient b0 data register bits 7:0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C5B7 C5B6 C5B5 C5B4 C5B3 C5B2 C5B1 C5B0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

6.23.17 Coefficient write/read control register

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Reserved RA R1 WA W1
0 0 0 0 0

Coefficients for user-defined EQ, mixing, scaling, and bass management are handled
internally in the STA380BW via RAM. Access to this RAM is available to the user via an I2C
register interface. A collection of I2C registers is dedicated to this function. One contains a
coefficient base address, five sets of three store the values of the 24-bit coefficients to be
written or that were read, and one contains bits used to control the write/read of the
coefficient(s) to/from RAM.
Note: The read and write operation on RAM coefficients works only if the LRCKI pin is switching.

DocID024543 Rev 1 79/162


Register description: New Map STA380BW

Reading a coefficient from RAM


1. Write 6 bits of the address to I2C register 0x27.
2. Write 1 to the R1 bit in I2C address 0x37.
3. Read the top 8 bits of the coefficient in I2C address 0x28.
4. Read the middle 8 bits of the coefficient in I2C address 0x29.
5. Read the bottom 8 bits of the coefficient in I2C address 0x2A.

Reading a set of coefficients from RAM


1. Write 6 bits of the address to I2C register 0x27.
2. Write 1 to the RA bit in I2C address 0x37.
3. Read the top 8 bits of the coefficient in I2C address 0x28.
4. Read the middle 8 bits of the coefficient in I2C address 0x29.
5. Read the bottom 8 bits of the coefficient in I2C address 0x2A.
6. Read the top 8 bits of coefficient b2 in I2C address 0x2B.
7. Read the middle 8 bits of coefficient b2 in I2C address 0x2C.
8. Read the bottom 8 bits of coefficient b2 in I2C address 0x2D.
9. Read the top 8 bits of coefficient a1 in I2C address 0x2E.
10. Read the middle 8 bits of coefficient a1 in I2C address 0x2F.
11. Read the bottom 8 bits of coefficient a1 in I2C address 0x30.
12. Read the top 8 bits of coefficient a2 in I2C address 0x31.
13. Read the middle 8 bits of coefficient a2 in I2C address 0x32.
14. Read the bottom 8 bits of coefficient a2 in I2C address 0x33.
15. Read the top 8 bits of coefficient b0 in I2C address 0x34.
16. Read the middle 8 bits of coefficient b0 in I2C address 0x35.
17. Read the bottom 8 bits of coefficient b0 in I2C address 0x36.

Writing a single coefficient to RAM


1. Write 6 bits of the address to I2C register 0x27.
2. Write the top 8 bits of the coefficient in I2C address 0x28.
3. Write the middle 8 bits of the coefficient in I2C address 0x29.
4. Write the bottom 8 bits of the coefficient in I2C address 0x2A.
5. Write 1 to the W1 bit in I2C address 0x37.

80/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: New Map

Writing a set of coefficients to RAM


1. Write 6 bits of the starting address to I2C register 0x27.
2. Write the top 8 bits of coefficient b1 in I2C address 0x28.
3. Write the middle 8 bits of coefficient b1 in I2C address 0x29.
4. Write the bottom 8 bits of coefficient b1 in I2C address 0x2A.
5. Write the top 8 bits of coefficient b2 in I2C address 0x2B.
6. Write the middle 8 bits of coefficient b2 in I2C address 0x2C.
7. Write the bottom 8 bits of coefficient b2 in I2C address 0x2D.
8. Write the top 8 bits of coefficient a1 in I2C address 0x2E.
9. Write the middle 8 bits of coefficient a1 in I2C address 0x2F.
10. Write the bottom 8 bits of coefficient a1 in I2C address 0x30.
11. Write the top 8 bits of coefficient a2 in I2C address 0x31.
12. Write the middle 8 bits of coefficient a2 in I2C address 0x32.
13. Write the bottom 8 bits of coefficient a2 in I2C address 0x33.
14. Write the top 8 bits of coefficient b0 in I2C address 0x34.
15. Write the middle 8 bits of coefficient b0 in I2C address 0x35.
16. Write the bottom 8 bits of coefficient b0 in I2C address 0x36.
17. Write 1 to the WA bit in I2C address 0x37.
The mechanism for writing a set of coefficients to RAM provides a method of updating the
five coefficients corresponding to a given biquad (filter) simultaneously to avoid possible
unpleasant acoustic side effects. When using this technique, the 6-bit address specifies the
address of the biquad b1 coefficient (for example, 0, 5, 10, 20, 35 decimal), and the
STA380BW generates the RAM addresses as offsets from this base value to write the
complete set of coefficient data.

DocID024543 Rev 1 81/162


Register description: New Map STA380BW

6.23.18 User-defined EQ
The STA380BW can be programmed for four EQ filters (biquads) per each of the two input
channels. The biquads use the following equation:
Y[n] = 2 * (b0 / 2) * X[n] + 2 * (b1 / 2) * X[n-1] + b2 * X[n-2] - 2 * (a1 / 2) * Y[n-1] - a2 * Y[n-2]
= b0 * X[n] + b1 * X[n-1] + b2 * X[n-2] - a1 * Y[n-1] - a2 * Y[n-2]
where Y[n] represents the output and X[n] represents the input. Multipliers are 24-bit signed
fractional multipliers, with coefficient values in the range of 0x800000 (-1) to 0x7FFFFF
(0.9999998808).
Coefficients stored in the user-defined coefficient RAM are referenced in the following
manner:
CxHy0 = b1 / 2
CxHy1 = b2
CxHy2 = -a1 / 2
CxHy3 = -a2
CxHy4 = b0 / 2
where x represents the channel and the y the biquad number. For example, C2H41 is the b2
coefficient in the fourth biquad for channel 2.
Additionally, the STA380BW can be programmed for a high-pass filter (processing
channels 1 and 2) and a low-pass filter (processing channel 3) to be used for bass-
management crossover when the XO setting is 000 (user-defined). Both of these filters
when defined by the user (rather than using the preset crossover filters) are second order
filters that use the biquad equation given above. They are loaded into the C12H0-4 and
C3Hy0-4 areas of RAM noted in Table 73.
Channel 1 and channel 2 biquads use by default the extended coefficient range (-4, +4);
Xover filters use only the standard coefficients range (-1, +1).
By default, all user-defined filters are pass-through where all coefficients are set to 0, except
the channel 1 and 2 b0/2 coefficient which is set to 0x100000 (representing 0.5) and Xover
b0/2 coefficient which is set to 0x400000 (representing 0.5).

6.23.19 Pre-scale
The STA380BW provides a multiplication for each input channel for the purpose of scaling
the input prior to EQ. This pre-EQ scaling is accomplished by using a 24-bit signed
fractional multiplier, with 0x800000 = -1 and 0x7FFFFF = 0.9999998808. The scale factor
for this multiplication is loaded into RAM using the same I2C registers as the biquad
coefficients and the bass management. All channels can use the channel-1 pre-scale factor
by setting the biquad link bit. By default, all pre-scale factors are set to 0x7FFFFF.

6.23.20 Post-scale
The STA380BW provides one additional multiplication after the last interpolation stage and
the distortion compensation on each channel. This post-scaling is accomplished by using a
24-bit signed fractional multiplier, with 0x800000 = -1 and 0x7FFFFF = 0.9999998808. The
scale factor for this multiplication is loaded into RAM using the same I2C registers as the
biquad coefficients and the bass management. This post-scale factor can be used in
conjunction with an ADC-equipped microcontroller to perform power-supply error correction.
All channels can use the channel-1 post-scale factor by setting the post-scale link bit. By

82/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: New Map

default, all post-scale factors are set to 0x7FFFFF. When line output is being used,
channel-3 post-scale will affect both channels 3 and 4.

Table 72. RAM block for biquads, mixing, scaling and bass management
Index (decimal) Index (hex) Description Coefficient Default
0 0x00 C1H10(b1/2) 0x000000
1 0x01 C1H11(b2) 0x000000
2 0x02 Channel 1 - Biquad 1 C1H12(a1/2) 0x000000
3 0x03 C1H13(a2) 0x000000
4 0x04 C1H14(b0/2) 0x100000
5 0x05 Channel 1 - Biquad 2 C1H20 0x000000
… … … … …
19 0x13 Channel 1 - Biquad 4 C1H44 0x100000
20 0x14 C2H10 0x000000
Channel 2 - Biquad 1
21 0x15 C2H11 0x000000
… … … … …
39 0x27 Channel 2 - Biquad 4 C2H44 0x100000
40 0x28 C12H0(b1/2) 0x000000
41 0x29 Channel 1/2 - Biquad 5 C12H1(b2) 0x000000
for XO = 000
42 0x2A C12H2(a1/2) 0x000000
High-pass 2nd order filter
43 0x2B for XO000 C12H3(a2) 0x000000
44 0x2C C12H4(b0/2) 0x400000
45 0x2D C3H0(b1/2) 0x000000
46 0x2E Channel 3 - Biquad C3H1(b2) 0x000000
for XO = 000
47 0x2F C3H2(a1/2) 0x000000
Low-pass 2nd order filter
48 0x30 for XO000 C3H3(a2) 0x000000
49 0x31 C3H4(b0/2) 0x400000
50 0x32 Channel 1 - Pre-Scale C1PreS 0x7FFFFF
51 0x33 Channel 2 - Pre-Scale C2PreS 0x7FFFFF
52 0x34 Channel 1 - Post-Scale C1PstS 0x7FFFFF
53 0x35 Channel 2 - Post-Scale C2PstS 0x7FFFFF
54 0x36 Channel 3 - Post-Scale C3PstS 0x7FFFFF
55 0x37 Reserved reserved 0x5A9DF7
56 0x38 Channel 1 - Mix 1 C1MX1 0x7FFFFF
57 0x39 Channel 1 - Mix 2 C1MX2 0x000000
58 0x3A Channel 2 - Mix 1 C2MX1 0x000000
59 0x3B Channel 2 - Mix 2 C2MX2 0x7FFFFF
60 0x3C Channel 3 - Mix 1 C3MX1 0x400000
61 0x3D Channel 3 - Mix 2 C3MX2 0x400000
62 0x3E UNUSED
63 0x3F UNUSED

DocID024543 Rev 1 83/162


Register description: New Map STA380BW

6.24 Fault-detect recovery constant registers (addr 0x3C - 0x3D)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
FDRC15 FDRC14 FDRC13 FDRC12 FDRC11 FDRC10 FDRC9 FDRC8
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
FDRC7 FDRC6 FDRC5 FDRC4 FDRC3 FDRC2 FDRC1 FDRC0
0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0

The FDRC bits specify the 16-bit fault-detect recovery time delay. When FAULT is asserted,
the TRISTATE output is immediately asserted low and held low for the time period specified
by this constant. A constant value of 0x0001 in this register is approximately 0.083 ms. The
default value of 0x300C gives approximately 1 sec.
0x0000 is a reserved value.

6.25 Extended configuration register (addr 0x47)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Reserved Reserved PS48DB XAR1 XAR2 BQ5 BQ6 BQ7
0 0 0 0 1 1 1

The extended configuration register provides access to biquad 5, 6 and 7.

6.25.1 Extended post-scale range

Table 73. Extended post-scale range


PS48DB Mode

0 Post-scale value is applied as defined in the coefficient RAM


Post-scale value is applied with a +48 dB offset with respect to the
1
coefficient RAM value

Post-scale is an attenuation by default. When PS48DB is set to 1, a 48-dB offset is applied


to the coefficient RAM value, so post-scale can act as a gain too.

6.25.2 Extended attack rate


The attack rate shown in Table 67 can be extended to provide up to an 8 dB/ms attack rate
on both limiters.

Table 74. Extended attack rate, limiter 1


XAR1 Mode

0 Limiter1 attack rate is configured using Table 67


1 Limiter1 attack rate is 8 dB/ms

84/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: New Map

Table 75. Extended attack rate, limiter 2


XAR2 Mode

0 Limiter2 attack rate is configured using Table 67


1 Limiter2 attack rate is 8 dB/ms

6.25.3 Extended biquad selector


Bass and treble controls can be configured as user-defined filters when the equalization
coefficients link is activated (BQL = 1) and the corresponding BQx bit is set to 1.

Table 76. Extended biquad selector, biquad 5


BQ5 Mode

0 Reserved
1 User-defined biquad 5 coefficients are selected

Table 77. Extended biquad selector, biquad 6


BQ6 Mode

0 Pre-set bass filter selected as per Table 66


1 User-defined biquad 6 coefficients are selected

Table 78. Extended biquad selector, biquad 7


BQ7 Mode

0 Pre-set treble filter selected as per Table 66


1 User-defined biquad 7 coefficients are selected

When filters from the 5th to 7th are configured as user-programmable, the corresponding
coefficients are stored respectively in addresses 0x20-0x24 (BQ5), 0x25-0x29 (BQ6), 0x2A-
0x2E (BQ7) as given in Table 73.
Note: The BQx bits are ignored if BQL = 0 or if DEMP = 1 (relevant for BQ5) or CxTCB = 1
(relevant for BQ6 and BQ7).

DocID024543 Rev 1 85/162


Register description: New Map STA380BW

6.26 PLL configuration registers (address 0x52; 0x53; 0x54; 0x55;


0x56; 0x57)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
PLL_FRAC[15:8]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
PLL_FRAC[7:0]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
PLL_DITH[1:0] PLL_NDIV[5:0]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
PLL_DPD PLL_FCT PLL_STB PLL_STBBYP PLL_IDIV[3:0]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Reserved Reserved PLL_DIRP PLL_PWD PLL_BYP OSC_PD Reserved BOOST32K
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved BYPSTATE PDSTATE OSCOK LOWCK
NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

By default, the STA380BW is able to configure the embedded PLL automatically depending
on the MCS bits (reg 0x00). For certain applications and to provide flexibility to the user, a
manual PLL configuration can be used (setting PLL_DIRP to ‘1’)
The output PLL frequency formula is:

 NDIV  - +  FRAC
Fin   -------------------------- ----------------- 
  IDIV + 1   65536  

where Fin is the input clock frequency from the pad.

Table 79. PLL factors


PLL parameter Min Max

FRAC 0 65535
IDIV 0 3
NDIV 5 55

86/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: New Map

Table 80. PLL register 0x54 bits


Bit R/W RST Name Description
7 R/W 0 “00”: PLL clock dithering disabled
“01”: PLL clock dithering enabled (triangular)
PLL_DITH[1:0]
6 R/W 0 “10”: PLL clock dithering enabled (rectangular)
“11”: reserved
5 R/W 0
4 R/W 0
3 R/W 0
PLL_NDIV PLL loop divider
2 R/W 0
1 R/W 0
0 R/W 0

Table 81. PLL register 0x55 bits


Bit R/W RST Name Description

‘0’: any PLL dividers change is implemented via PLL


power-down
7 R/W 0 PLL_DPD
‘1’: PLL divider change will happen without PLL power-
down
‘0’: PLL use integer ratio
6 R/W 0 PLL_FCT
‘1’: PLL use fractional ratio
5 R/W 0 PLL_STB PLL synchronous divider changes strobe
‘0’: PLL_STB is active
4 R/W 0 PLL_STBBYP
‘1’: PLL_STB control is bypassed
3 R/W 0
2 R/W 0
PLL_IDIV[3:0] Input PLL divider
1 R/W 0
0 R/W 0

Table 82. PLL register 0x56 bits


Bit R/W RST Name Description

‘0’: PLL configuration is determined by the MCS bits


5 R/W 0 PLL_DIRP ‘1’: PLL configuration is determined by FRAC, IDIV and
NDIV
‘0’: PLL normal behavior
4 R/W 0 PLL_PWD
‘1’: PLL is in power-down mode
‘0’: sys clock is from PLL
3 R/W 0 PLL_BYP
‘1’: sys clock is from external pin (PLL is bypassed)
‘0’: Normal behavior
2 R/W 0 OSC_PD
‘1’: Internal oscillator is in power-down
‘0’: Input oversampling selected by the IR bits
0 R/W 0 BOOST32K
‘1’: Input oversampling is selected x3

DocID024543 Rev 1 87/162


Register description: New Map STA380BW

Table 83. PLL register 0x57 bits


Bit R/W RST Name Description

3 R/W BYPSTATE PLL bypass state


2 R/W PDSTATE PLL PD state
1 R/W OSCOK OSCI locked
0 R/W LOWCK Clock input low-frequency check

6.27 Short-circuit protection mode registers SHOK (address 0x58)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved GNDSH VCCSH OUTSH
NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

The following power bridge pins short-circuit protections are implemented in the
STA380BW:
 OUTxx vs. GNDx
 OUTxx vs. VCCx
 OUT1B vs. OUT2A
The protection is enabled when reg. 0x50 bit 0 (SHEN) is set to ‘1’. The protection will check
the short-circuit when the EAPD bit is toggled from ‘0’ to ‘1’ (i.e. the power bridge is switched
on), and only if the test passes (no short), does the power bridge leave the tristate condition.
Register 0x58 (read-only registers) will give more information about the detected short type.
GNDSH equal to ‘0’ means that OUTxx is shorted to ground, while the same value on
VCCSH means that OUTxx is shorted to Vcc, finally OUTSH=’0’ means that OUT1B is
shorted to OUT2A.
To be noted that once the check is performed, and the tristate released, the short protection
is not active anymore until the next EAPD 0->1 toggling which means that shorts that
happened during normal operation cannot be detected.
To be noted that register SHOK is meaningful only after the EAPD bit is set to ‘1’ at least
once.
The short-circuit protections implemented are effective only in BTL configuration, and they
must not be activated if a single-ended application scheme is needed.

88/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: New Map

Figure 28. Short-circuit detection timing diagram (no short detected)


Star t g n d tes t Star t v c c tes t Start out test En d o f Sh o r t tes t

EAPD

OUT1A

OUT1B

OUT2A

OUT2B

GNDSH]

VCCSH

OUTSH]
50005 cycles TBD cycles
44 50005 cycles
1cycle
cycles

In Figure 28 the short protection timing diagram is shown. The time information is expressed
in clock cycles, where the clock frequency is defined as in section Section 6.12.1: Master
clock select. The gray color is used for the short status bits to indicate that the bits are
carrying the status of the previous EAPD 0->1 toggling (to be noted that after reset this state
is meaningless since no EAPD transition occurs). The GND-related SHOK bits are updated
as soon as the gnd test is completed, the VCC bits are updated after vcc test is completed,
and the SOUT bit is updated after the shorted output test is completed. The gnd test, vcc
test and output test, are always run (if the SHEN bit is active and EAPD toggled to ‘1’), and
only if both tests are successful (no short) do the bridge outputs leave the tristate (indicated
by dotted lines in the figure). If one of the three tests (or all) fail, the power bridge outputs
are kept in the tristate until the procedure is restarted with a new EAPD toggling.
In this figure EAPD is intended to be bit 7 of register 0x05.

6.28 Extended coefficient range up to -4...4 (address 0x5A)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
CEXT_B4[1] CEXT_B4[0] CEXT_B3[1] CEXT_B3[0] CEXT_B2[1] CEXT_B2[0] CEXT_B1[1] CEXT_B1[0]
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
reserved reserved CEXT_B7[1] CEXT_B7[0] CEXT_B6[1] CEXT_B6[0] CEXT_B51] CEXT_B5[0]
0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

Biquads from 1 to 7 have in the STA380BW the possibility to extend the coefficient range
from [-1,1) to [-4..4) which allows the use of high-shelf filters that may require a coefficient
dynamic greater in absolute value than 1.
Three ranges are available, [-1;1) [-2;2) [-4;4). By default, the extended range is activated.
Each biquad has its independent setting according to the following table.

DocID024543 Rev 1 89/162


Register description: New Map STA380BW

Table 84. Coefficients extended range configuration


CEXT_Bx[1] CEXT_Bx[0] Range

0 0 [-1;1)
0 1 [-2;2)
1 0 [-4;4)
1 1 Reserved

In this case the user can decide, for each filter stage, the right coefficient range. Note that
for a given biquad the same range will be applied to the left and right (channel 1 and
channel 2).
The crossover biquad does not have the availability of this feature, maintaining the [-1;1)
range unchanged.

6.29 Miscellaneous registers (address 0x5C, 0x5D)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
RPDNEN Reserved BRIDGOFF Reserved Reserved CPWMEN Reserved Reserved
0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
LPDP LPD LPDE PNDLSL[2] PNDLSL[1] PNDLSL[0] Reserved SHEN
0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0

6.29.1 Rate power-down enable (RPDNEN) bit


In the STA380BW, by default, the power-down pin and I2C power-down act on mute
commands to perform the fade-out. This default can be changed so that the fade-out can be
started using the master volume. The RPDNEN bit, when set, activates this feature.

6.29.2 Bridge immediately off (BRIDGOFF) bit (address 0x4B, bit D5)
A fade-out procedure is started in the STA380BW once the PWDN function is enabled, and
after 13 million clock cycles (PLL internal frequency) the bridge is put in power-down
(tristate mode). There is also the possibility to change this behavior so that the power bridge
will be switched off immediately after the PWDN pin is tied to ground, without waiting for the
13 million clock cycles. The BRIDGOFF bit, when set, activates this function. Obviously the
immediate power-down will generate a pop noise at the output, therefore this procedure
must be used only in cases where pop noise is not relevant in the application. Note that this
feature works only for hardware PWDN assertion and not for a power-down applied through
the IIC interface. Refer to Section 6.29.5 if programming a different number of clock cycles
is needed.

90/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: New Map

6.29.3 Channel PWM enable (CPWMEN) bit


This bit, when set, activates a mute output in case the volume reaches a value lower
than -76 dBFS.

6.29.4 External amplifier hardware pin enabler (LPDP, LPD LPDE) bits
Pin 42 (INTLINE), normally indicating a fault condition, using the following 3 register settings
can be reconfigured as a hardware pin enabler for an external headphone or line amplifier.
In particular the LPDE bit, when set, activates this function. Accordingly, the LPD value (0 or
1) is exported on pin 42 and in case of power-down assertion, pin 42 is tied to LPDP.
The LPDP bit, when set, negates the value programmed as the LPD value, refer to the
following table.

Table 85. External amplifier enabler configuration bits


LPDP LPD LPDE Pin 42 output

x x 0 INT_LINE

0 0 1 0

0 1 1 1

1 0 1 1

1 1 1 0

Figure 29. Alternate function for INTLINE pin

Po w er B rid ge Fau lt

0
‘0 ’ Y 0 IN T L IN E

1
LPD N 1

LPD E
“is the d evice in p ow erd o w n ?” LP D P

6.29.5 Power-down delay selector (PNDLSL[2:0]) bits


The assertion of PWDN activates a counter that, by default, after 13 million clock cycles puts
the power bridge in tristate mode, independently from the fade-out time. Using these
registers it is possible to program this counter according to the following table.

DocID024543 Rev 1 91/162


Register description: New Map STA380BW

Table 86. PNDLSL bits configuration


PNDLSL[2] PNDLSL[1] PNDLSL[2] Fade-out time

0 0 0 Default time (13M PLL clock cycles)


0 0 1 Default time divided by 2
0 1 0 Default time divided by 4
0 1 1 Default time divided by 8
1 0 0 Default time divided by 16
1 0 1 Default time divided by 32
1 1 0 Default time divided by 64
1 1 1 Default time divided by 128

6.29.6 Short-circuit check enable bit


This bit, when enabled, will activate the short-circuit checks before any power bridge
activation (EAPD bit 0->1). See section Section 6.27: Short-circuit protection mode registers
SHOK (address 0x58) for more details.

6.30 Bad PWM detection registers (address 0x5E, 0x5F, 0x60)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
BPTH[5] BPTH[4] BPTH[3] BPTH[2] BPTH[1] BPTH[0] reserved reserved
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
BPTIM[7] BPTIM[6] BPTIM[5] BPTIM[4] BPTIM[3] BPTIM[2] BPTIM[1] BPTIM[0]
0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0

The STA380BW implements a detection on PWM outputs able to verify if the output signal
has no zero-crossing in a configurable time window. This check can be useful to detect the
DC level in the PWM outputs. To be noted that the checks are performed on logic level
PWM (i.e. not the power bridge ones, nor the PWM on ))X3 and ))X4 IOs).
In case of ternary modulation, the detection threshold is computed as:
TH=[(BPTH*2+1)/128]*100%
If the measured PWM duty cycle is detected greater than or equal to TH for more than
BPTIM PWM periods, the corresponding PWM bit will be set in register 0x01.
In case of binary modulation, there are two thresholds:
TH1=[(64+BPTH)/128]*100%
TH2=[(64-BPTH)/128]*100%
In this case if the measured PWM duty cycle is outside the TH1-TH2 range for more than
BPTIM PWM periods, the corresponding bit will be set in register 0x4E.

92/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: New Map

6.31 Enhanced zero-detect mute and input level measurement


(address 0x61-0x65, 0x3F, 0x40, 0x6F)
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
WTHH WTHL FINETH HSEL[1:0] ZMTH[2:0]
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
RMS_CH0[7:0]
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
RMS_CH0[15:8]
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
RMS_CH1[7:0]
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
RMS_CH1[15:8]
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

The STA380BW implements an RMS-based zero-detect function (on serial input interface
data) able to detect in a very reliable way the presence of an input signal, so that the power
bridge outputs can be automatically connected to ground.
When active, the function will mute the output PWM when the input level becomes less than
“threshold - hysteresis”. Once muted, the PWM will be unmuted when the input level is
detected greater than “threshold + hysteresis”.
The measured level is then reported (for each input channel) on registers ZCCCFG1 -
ZCCCFG2, ZCCCFG3 - ZCCCFG4 according to the following equation:
Value_in_dB = 20*Log10(Reg_value/(216*0.635))

Table 87. Zero-detect threshold


ZMTH[2:0] Equivalent input level (dB)

000 -78
001 -84
010 -90
011 -96
100 -102
101 -108
110 -114
111 -114

DocID024543 Rev 1 93/162


Register description: New Map STA380BW

Table 88. Zero-detect hysteresis


HSEL[1:0] Equivalent input level hysteresis(dB)

00 3
01 4
10 5
11 6

The thresholds and hysteresis table above can be overridden and the low-level threshold
and high-level threshold can be set by the MTH[21:0] bits.
To activate the manual thresholds the FINETH bit has to be set to ‘1’.
To configure the low threshold, the WTHL bit must be set to ‘1’ so that any write operation to
the MTH bits will set the low threshold.
To configure the low threshold, the WTHH bit must be set to ‘1’ so that any write operation to
the MTH bits will set the low threshold.
If the zero-mute block does not detect mute, it will mute the output when the current RMS
value falls below the low threshold.
If the zero-mute block does not detect mute, it will unmute the output when the current RMS
value rises above the high threshold.

Table 89. Manual threshold register 0x3F, 0x40 and 0x6F

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
ReservedT Reserved MTH[21:16]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
MTH[15:8]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
MTH[7:0]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

94/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: New Map

6.32 STCompressorTM configuration register (address 0x6B;


0x6C)
Table 90. Register STCCFG0
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved CRC_RES Reserved Reserved
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

Table 91. STCCFG0 register


Bit R/W RST Name Description

‘0’ = CRC comparison successful


2 R/W 0 CRC_RES
‘1’ = CRC comparison error

Table 92. Register STCCFG1


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved STC_LNK Reserved
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Table 93. STCCFG1 register


Bit R/W RST Name Description

‘0’ = normal operations


1 R/W 0 STC_LNK ‘1’ = stereo link enabled. See Section 4.3.8:
Stereo link

DocID024543 Rev 1 95/162


Register description: New Map STA380BW

6.33 Coefficient RAM CRC protection (address 0x71-0x7D)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
BQCKE[7] BQCKE[6] BQCKE[5] BQCKE[4] BQCKE[3] BQCKE[2] BQCKE[1] BQCKE[0]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
BQCKE[15] BQCKE[14] BQCKE[13] BQCKE[12] BQCKE[11] BQCKE[10] BQCKE[9] BQCKE[8]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
BQCKE[23] BQCKE[22] BQCKE[21] BQCKE[20] BQCKE[19] BQCKE[18] BQCKE[17] BQCKE[16]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
XCCKE[7] XCCKE[6] XCCKE[5] XCCKE[4] XCCKE[3] XCCKE[2] XCCKE[1] XCCKE[0]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
XCCKE[15] XCCKE[14] XCCKE[13] XCCKE[12] XCCKE[11] XCCKE[10] XCCKE[9] XCCKE[8]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
XCCKE[23] XCCKE[22] XCCKE[21] XCCKE[20] XCCKE[19] XCCKE[18] XCCKE[17] XCCKE[16]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
BQCKR[7] BQCKR[6] BQCKR[5] BQCKR[4] BQCKR[3] BQCKR[2] BQCKR[1] BQCKR[0]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
BQCKR[15] BQCKR[14] BQCKR[13] BQCKR[12] BQCKR[11] BQCKR[10] BQCKR[9] BQCKR[8]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
BQCKR[23] BQCKR[22] BQCKR[21] BQCKR[20] BQCKR[19] BQCKR[18] BQCKR[17] BQCKR[16]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
XCCKR[23] XCCKR[22] XCCKR[21] XCCKR[20] XCCKR[19] XCCKR[18] XCCKR[17] XCCKR[16]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
XCCKR[23] XCCKR[22] XCCKR[21] XCCKR[20] XCCKR[19] XCCKR[18] XCCKR[17] XCCKR[16]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
XCCKR[23] XCCKR[22] XCCKR[21] XCCKR[20] XCCKR[19] XCCKR[18] XCCKR[17] XCCKR[16]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
XCAUTO XCRES XCCMP XCGO BCAUTO BCCRES BCCMP BCCGO
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

96/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: New Map

The STA380BW implements an automatic CRC computation for the biquad and
MDRC/XOver coefficient memory (Table 73). Memory cell contents from address 0x00 to
0x27 will be bit XORed to obtain the BQCHKE checksum, while cells from 0x28 to 0x31 will
be XORed to obtain the XCCHKE checksum. Both checksums (24-bit wide) are exported on
I2C registers from 0x60 to 0x65. The checksum computation will start as soon as the BCGO
(for biquad RAM bank) or the XCGO bit (for MDRC/XOver coefficients) is set to 1. The
checksum is computed at the processing sample rate if the IR bits equal “01” or “10”,
otherwise the checksum is computed to half of the processing sample rate.
When BCCMP or XCCMP is set to ‘1’, the relative checksum (BQCHKE and XCCHKE) is
continuously compared with BQCHKR and XCCHKR respectively. If the checksum matches
its own reference value, the respective result bits (BCRES and XCRES) will be set to ‘0’.
The compare bits have no effect if the respective GO bit is not set.
In case of checksum errors (i.e. the internally computed didn’t match the reference), an
automatic device reset action can be activated. This function is enabled when the BCAUTO
or XCAUTO bit is set to ‘1’. The automatic reset bits have no effect if the respective compare
bits are not set.
The recommended procedure for automatic reset activation is the following:
 Download the set of coefficients (RAM locations 0x00…0x27)
 Download the externally computed biquad checksum into registers BQCHKR
 Enable the checksum of the biquad coefficients by setting the BCGO bit. The
checksum will start to be automatically computed by the STA380BW and its value
exposed on registers BQCHECKE. The checksum value is computed and updated.
 Enable the checksum comparison by setting the BCCMP bit. The internally computed
checksum will start to be compared with the reference one and the result will be
exposed on the BCRES bit. The following operation will be executed on each audio
frame:
if ((BQCHKE == BQCHKR))
{
BC_RES = 0;// Checksum is ok, reset the error bit
}
else
{
BC_RES = 1;// Checksum error detected, set the error bit
}
 Wait until the BCRES bit goes to 0, meaning that the checksum result bit has started to
be updated and everything is ok. Time-out of this operation (e.g. >1 ms) will indicate
checksum failure, and the MCU will handle this event
 Enable automatic reset of the device in case of checksum error by setting the BCAUTO
bit. The BCRES bit will then be automatically checked by the STA380BW, on each
audio frame, and a reset event will be triggered in case of checksum mismatch.
 Periodically check the BC_RES status. A value of 1 indicates a checksum mismatch
has occurred and, therefore, that the device went through a reset cycle.
The previous example is intended for biquad CRC bank calculation, but it can be easily
extended to MDRC/XOver CRC computation.

DocID024543 Rev 1 97/162


Register description: New Map STA380BW

6.34 MISC4 (address 0x7E)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
SMAP reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved WRA CH12
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Table 94. Misc register 4


Bit R/W RST Name Description

‘1’ = NEW MAP


7 R/W 1 SMAP
‘0’ = STMAP
‘0’ = normal operations
1 R/W 0 WRA ‘1’ = enables the write-all procedure when using the
RAM coefficients direct access
‘0’ = normal operations
0 R/W 0 CH12
‘1’ = enables the RAM coefficients direct access

The STA380BW allows direct access to the RAM coefficients bypassing the indirect access
mechanism described in Section 6.23: User-defined coefficient control registers (addr 0x27
- 0x37). Direct access is implemented as follows.

98/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: New Map

Direct single-write procedure


1. Set reg 0x7E bit 0 to 1 and bit 1 to 0 to enable the direct RAM access in single-write
mode.
2. Write the coefficient value to the device using an I2C bus single-write operation as
discribed in Figure 30.

Figure 30. Coefficients direct access single-write operation

Direct multi-write procedure


1. Set the reg 0x7E bit 0 to 1 and bit 1 to 1 to enable direct RAM access in multi-write
mode.
2. Write the coefficients value to the device using an I2C bus multi-write operation as
discribed in Figure 31. Please note that by using the multi-write procedure, it is possible
to write the entire RAM contents at once.

Figure 31. Coefficients direct access multiple-write operation


S Slave address w A Mem Addr A

Coeff_0(3) A Coeff_0(2) A Coeff_0(1) A Coeff_0(0) A

Coeff_1(3) A Coeff_1(2) A Coeff_1(1) A Coeff_1(0) A

Coeff_n(3) A Coeff_n(2) A Coeff_n(1) A Coeff_n(0) A

Direct single-read procedure


1. Set reg 0x7E bit 0 to 1 and bit 1 to 0 to enable the direct RAM access in single-read
mode.
2. Read the coefficient value from the device using an I2C bus single-read operation as
discribed in Figure 32.

Figure 32. Coefficients direct access single-read operation

Please be aware that the STA380BW supports 24-bit coefficients, for this reason in the
above figures Coeff_x(0) is always equal to 0x00 when either reading or writing. The multi-
write procedure embeds a wrap-around mechanism: when trying to write into a location
exceeding the maximum coefficient address, the multi-write procedure will start from
location 0x00.

DocID024543 Rev 1 99/162


Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility STA380BW

7 Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility

To keep compatibility with previous Sound Terminal devices, the 0x7E bit D7 must be set to
0 after device turn-on and after any reset (via SW or via external pin).
Missing addresses are to be considered as reserved.

Table 95. I2C registers summary


Addr Name D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

00 CONFA FDRB IR1 IR0 MCS2 MCS1 MCS0


01 CONFB C2IM C1IM DSCKE SAIFB SAI3 SAI2 SAI1 SAI0
02 CONFC CSZ3 CSZ2 CSZ1 CSZ0 OM1 OM0
03 CONFD SME ZDE BQL PSL DSPB
04 CONFE SVE ZCE PWMS AME NSBW
05 CONFF EAPD PWDN LDTE BCLE IDE OCFG1 OCFG0
06 MUTELOC LOC1 LOC0 BQB_ALL C3M C2M C1M MMUTE
07 MVOL MVOL[7:0]
08 CH1VOL CH1VOL[7:0]
09 CH2VOL CH2VOL[7:0]
0A CH3VOL CH3VOL[7:0]
0C AUTO XO3 XO2 XO1 XO0 AMAM2 AMAM1 AMAM0 AMAME
0E C1CFG C1OM1 C1OM0 C1LS1 C1LS0 C1BO C1VBP C1EQBP C1TCB
0F C2CFG C2OM1 C2OM0 C2LS1 C2LS0 C2BO C2VBP C2EQBP C2TCB
10 C3CFG C3OM1 C3OM0 C3LS1 C3LS0 C3BO C3VBP
11 TONE TTC3 TTC2 TTC1 TTC0 BTC3 BTC2 BTC1 BTC0
12 L1AR L1A3 L1A2 L1A1 L1A0 L1R3 L1R2 L1R1 L1R0
13 L1ATRT L1AT3 L1AT2 L1AT1 L1AT0 L1RT3 L1RT2 L1RT1 L1RT0
14 L2AR L2A3 L2A2 L2A1 L2A0 L2R3 L2R2 L2R1 L2R0
15 L2ATRT L2AT3 L2AT2 L2AT1 L2AT0 L2RT3 L2RT2 L2RT1 L2RT0
16 CFADDR CFA5 CFA4 CFA3 CFA2 CFA1 CFA0
17 B1CF1 C1B23 C1B22 C1B21 C1B20 C1B19 C1B18 C1B17 C1B16
18 B1CF2 C1B15 C1B14 C1B13 C1B12 C1B11 C1B10 C1B9 C1B8
19 B1CF3 C1B7 C1B6 C1B5 C1B4 C1B3 C1B2 C1B1 C1B0
1A B2CF1 C2B23 C2B22 C2B21 C2B20 C2B19 C2B18 C2B17 C2B16
1B B2CF2 C2B15 C2B14 C2B13 C2B12 C2B11 C2B10 C2B9 C2B8
1C B2CF3 C2B7 C2B6 C2B5 C2B4 C2B3 C2B2 C2B1 C2B0
1D A1CF1 C3B23 C3B22 C3B21 C3B20 C3B19 C3B18 C3B17 C3B16
1E A1CF2 C3B15 C3B14 C3B13 C3B12 C3B11 C3B10 C3B9 C3B8

100/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility

Table 95. I2C registers summary (continued)


1F A1CF3 C3B7 C3B6 C3B5 C3B4 C3B3 C3B2 C3B1 C3B0
20 A2CF1 C4B23 C4B22 C4B21 C4B20 C4B19 C4B18 C4B17 C4B16
21 A2CF2 C4B15 C4B14 C4B13 C4B12 C4B11 C4B10 C4B9 C4B8
22 A2CF3 C4B7 C4B6 C4B5 C4B4 C4B3 C4B2 C4B1 C4B0
23 B0CF1 C5B23 C5B22 C5B21 C5B20 C5B19 C5B18 C5B17 C5B16
24 B0CF2 C5B15 C5B14 C5B13 C5B12 C5B11 C5B10 C5B9 C5B8
25 B0CF3 C5B7 C5B6 C5B5 C5B4 C5B3 C5B2 C5B1 C5B0
26 CFUD RA R1 WA W1
2B FDRC1 FDRC15 FDRC14 FDRC13 FDRC12 FDRC11 FDRC10 FDRC9 FDRC8
2C FDRC2 FDRC7 FDRC6 FDRC5 FDRC4 FDRC3 FDRC2 FDRC1 FDRC0
2D STATUS PLLUL FAULT
2E MTH2 MTH[21:16]
2F MTH1 MTH[15:8]
31 EQCFG XOB
32 EATH1 EATHEN1 EATH1[6:0]
33 ERTH1 ERTHEN1 ERTH1[6:0]
34 EATH2 EATHEN2 EATH2[6:0]
35 ERTH2 ERTHEN2 ERTH2[6:0]
36 CONFX MDRCE PS48DB XAR1 XAR2 BQ5 BQ6 BQ7
SVUP_
37 SVUP SVUP_RATE[4:0]
EN
SVDN_
38 SVDN SVDN_RATE[4:0]
EN
VRESTG
3F EVOLRES VRES_EN EXVRES_CH3[1:0] EXVRES_CH2[1:0] EXVRES_CH1[1:0]
_EN
40 EVOLRES2 EXVRES_MVOL[1:0]
41 PLLFRAC1 PLL_FRAC[15:8]
42 PLLFRAC0 PLL_FRAC[7:0]
43 PLLDIV PLL_DITH[1:0] PLL_NDIV[5:0]
PLL_ PLL_ PLL_
44 PLLCFG0 PLL_STB PLL_IDIV[3:0]
DPD FCT STBBYP
PLL_ BOOST32
45 PLLCFG1 PLL_PWD PLL_BYP OSC_PD
DIRP K
46 PLLSTATE BYPSTATE PDSTATE OSCOK LOWCK
47 SHOK GNDSH VCCSH OUTSH
49 CXT41 CEXT_B4[1:0] CEXT_B3[1:0] CEXT_B2[1:0] CEXT_B1[1:0]
4A CXT75 CEXT_B7[1:0] CEXT_B6[1:0] CEXT_B5[1:0]

DocID024543 Rev 1 101/162


Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility STA380BW

Table 95. I2C registers summary (continued)


BRIDGOF
4B MISC1 RPDNEN CPWMEN
F
4C MISC2 LPDP LPD LPDE PNDLSL[2:0] SHEN
4D BPTH BPTH(5:0)
4E BADPWM BP4B BP4A BP3B BP3A BP2B BP2A BP1B BP1A
4F BPTIM BPTIM[7:0]
50 ZCCFG0 WTHH WTHL FINETH HSEL[1:0] ZMTH[2:0]
51 ZCCFG1 RMS_CH0[7:0]
52 ZCCFG2 RMS_CH0[15:8]
53 ZCCFG3 RMS_CH1[7:0]
54 ZCCFG4 RMS_CH1[15:8]
LIM_ NP_ NP_CRC_
5A STCCFG0 STC_BYP STC_ENA
BYP CRCRES GO
5B STCCFG1 STC_LNK BRC_EN
5E MTH0 MTH[7:0]

5F CHPSINC CHPI INITCNT[3:0] CHPRD

60 BQCHKE0 BQ_CKE[7:0]
61 BQCHKE1 BQ_CKE[15:8]
62 BQCHKE2 BQ_CKE[23:16]
63 XCCHKE0 XC_CKE[7:0]
64 XCCHKE1 XC_CKE[15:8]
65 XCCHKE2 XC_CKE[23:16]
66 BQCHKR0 BQ_CKR[7:0]
67 BQCHKR1 BQ_CKR[15:8]
68 BQCHKR2 BQ_CKR[23:16]
69 XCCHKR0 XC_CKR[7:0]
6A XCCHKR1 XC_CKR[15:8]
6B XCCHKR2 XC_CKR[23:16]
6C CHKCTRL XCAUTO XCRES XCCMP XCGO BCAUTO BCRES BCCMP BCGO
6E MISC3 SRESET
7E MISC4 SMAP

102/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility

7.1 Configuration register A (addr 0x00)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
FDRB Reserved Reserved IR1 IR0 MCS2 MCS1 MCS0
0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1

7.1.1 Master clock select

Table 96. Master clock select


Bit R/W RST Name Description

0 R/W 1 MCS0
Selects the ratio between the input I2S sampling
1 R/W 1 MCS1
frequency and the input clock.
2 R/W 1 MCS2

The STA380BW supports sampling rates of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz,
176.4 kHz, and 192 kHz. Therefore the internal clock is:
 32.768 MHz for 32 kHz
 45.1584 MHz for 44.1 kHz, 88.2 kHz, and 176.4 kHz
 49.152 MHz for 48 kHz, 96 kHz, and 192 kHz
The external clock frequency provided to the XTI pin or BICKI pin (depending on MCS
settings) must be a multiple of the input sampling frequency (fs).
The relationship between the input clock (either XTI or BICKI) and the input sampling rate is
determined by both the MCSx and the IR (input rate) register bits. The MCSx bits determine
the PLL factor generating the internal clock and the IR bit determines the oversampling ratio
used internally. In Table 98 MCS 111 and 110 indicate that BICKI has to be used as the
clock source, while XTI is used in all the other cases.

Table 97. Input sampling rates


Input
sampling rate IR MCS[2:0]
fs (kHz)

111 110 101 100 011 010 001 000

32, 44.1, 48 00 64*fs(*) NA 576 * fs 128 * fs 256 * fs 384 * fs 512 * fs 768 * fs


88.2, 96 01 64*fs(*) 32*fs(*) NA 64 * fs 128 * fs 192 * fs 256 * fs 384 * fs
176.4, 192 1X 64*fs(*) 32*fs(*) NA 32 * fs 64 * fs 96 * fs 128 * fs 192 * fs

Note: (*) Clock is BICKI

DocID024543 Rev 1 103/162


Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility STA380BW

7.1.2 Interpolation ratio select

Table 98. Internal interpolation ratio


Bit R/W RST Name Description

Selects internal interpolation ratio based on input I2S


4:3 R/W 00 IR [1:0]
sampling frequency

The STA380BW has variable interpolation (oversampling) settings such that internal
processing and FFX output rates remain consistent. The first processing block interpolates
by either 3 times (see Section 4.2), 2 times or 1 time (pass-through) or provides a 2 times
downsample. The oversampling ratio of this interpolation is determined by the IR bits.

Table 99. IR bit settings as a function of the input sampling rate


Input sampling rate fs (kHz) IR 1st stage interpolation ratio

32 00 2-times oversampling
44.1 00 2-times oversampling
48 00 2-times oversampling
88.2 01 Pass-through
96 01 Pass-through
176.4 10 2-times downsampling
192 10 2-times downsampling

7.1.3 Fault-detect recovery bypass

Table 100. Fault-detect recovery bypass


Bit R/W RST Name Description

0: fault-detect recovery enabled


7 R/W 0 FDRB
1: fault-detect recovery disabled

The on-chip STA380BW power output block provides feedback to the digital controller using
inputs to the power control block. The FAULT input is used to indicate a fault condition
(either overcurrent or thermal). When FAULT is asserted (set to 0), the power control block
attempts a recovery from the fault by asserting the tri-state output (setting it to 0 which
directs the power output block to begin recovery), holds it at 0 for period of time in the range
of 0.1 ms to 1 second as defined by the fault-detect recovery constant register (FDRC
registers 0x2B-0x2C), then toggles it back to 1. This sequence is repeated as long as the
fault indication exists. This feature is enabled by default, but can be bypassed by setting the
FDRB control bit to 1.

104/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility

7.2 Configuration register B (addr 0x01)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C2IM C1IM DSCKE SAIFB SAI3 SAI2 SAI1 SAI0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

7.2.1 Serial data interface


The STA380BW audio serial input was designed to interface with standard digital audio
components and to accept a number of serial data formats. The STA380BW always acts as
the slave when receiving audio input from standard digital audio components. Serial data for
two channels is provided using three inputs: left/right clock LRCKI, serial clock BICKI, and
serial data 1 and 2 SDI12.
The SAI bits (D3 to D0) and the SAIFB bit (D4) are used to specify the serial data format.
The default serial data format is I2S, MSB-first. Available formats are shown in the tables
that follow.

7.2.2 Serial audio input interface format

Table 101. Serial audio input interface


Bit R/W RST Name Description

0 R/W 0 SAI0
1 R/W 0 SAI1 Determines the interface format of the input serial
2 R/W 0 SAI2 digital audio interface

3 R/W 0 SAI3

7.2.3 Serial data first bit

Table 102. Serial data first bit


SAIFB Format

0 MSB-first
1 LSB-first

DocID024543 Rev 1 105/162


Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility STA380BW

Table 103. Support serial audio input formats for MSB-first (SAIFB = 0)
BICKI SAI [3:0] SAIFB Interface format

0000 0 I2S 15-bit data


32 * fs
0001 0 Left/right-justified 16-bit data
0000 0 I2S 16- to 23-bit data
0001 0 Left-justified 16- to 24-bit data
0010 0 Right-justified 24-bit data
48 * fs
0110 0 Right-justified 20-bit data
1010 0 Right-justified 18-bit data
1110 0 Right-justified 16-bit data
0000 0 I2S 16- to 24-bit data
0001 0 Left-justified 16- to 24-bit data
0010 0 Right-justified 24-bit data
64 * fs
0110 0 Right-justified 20-bit data
1010 0 Right-justified 18-bit data
1110 0 Right-justified 16-bit data

106/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility

Table 104. Supported serial audio input formats for LSB-first (SAIFB = 1)
BICKI SAI [3:0] SAIFB Interface format

1100 1 I2S 15-bit data


32 * fs
1110 1 Left/right-justified 16-bit data
0100 1 I2S 23-bit data
0100 1 I2S 20-bit data
1000 1 I2S 18-bit data
1100 1 LSB first I2S 16-bit data
0001 1 Left-justified 24-bit data
0101 1 Left-justified 20-bit data
48 * fs
1001 1 Left-justified 18-bit data
1101 1 Left-justified 16-bit data
0010 1 Right-justified 24-bit data
0110 1 Right-justified 20-bit data
1010 1 Right-justified 18-bit data
1110 1 Right-justified 16-bit data
0000 1 I2S 24-bit data
0100 1 I2S 20-bit data
1000 1 I2S 18-bit data
1100 1 LSB first I2S 16-bit data
0001 1 Left-justified 24-bit data
0101 1 Left-justified 20-bit data
64 * fs
1001 1 Left-justified 18-bit data
1101 1 Left-justified 16-bit data
0010 1 Right-justified 24-bit data
0110 1 Right-justified 20-bit data
1010 1 Right-justified 18-bit data
1110 1 Right-justified 16-bit data

To make the STA380BW work properly, the serial audio interface LRCKI clock must be
synchronous to the PLL output clock which means that:
 the frequency of PLL clock / frequency of LRCKI = N ±4 cycles, where N depends on
the settings in Table 29 on page 58
 the PLL must be locked.
If these two conditions are not met, and the IDE bit (reg 0x05 bit 2) is set to 1, the
STA380BW will immediately mute the I2S PCM data out (provided to the processing block)
and it will freeze any active processing task.
To avoid any audio side effects (like pop noise), it is strongly recommended to soft-mute any
audio streams flowing into the STA380BW data path before the desynchronization event

DocID024543 Rev 1 107/162


Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility STA380BW

happens. At the same time any processing related to the I2C configuration should be issued
only after the serial audio interface and the internal PLL are synchronous again.
Note: Any mute or volume change causes some delay in the completion of the I2C operation due
to the soft volume feature. The soft volume phase change must be finished before any clock
desynchronization.

7.2.4 Delay serial clock enable

Table 105. Delay serial clock enable


Bit R/W RST Name Description

0: No serial clock delay


5 R/W 0 DSCKE 1: Serial clock delay by 1 core clock cycle to tolerate
anomalies in some I2S master devices

7.2.5 Channel input mapping

Table 106. Channel input mapping


Bit R/W RST Name Description

0: Processing channel 1 receives left I2S input


6 R/W 0 C1IM
1: Processing channel 1 receives right I2S input
0: Processing channel 2 receives left I2S input
7 R/W 1 C2IM
1: Processing channel 2 receives right I2S input

Each channel received via I2S can be mapped to any internal processing channel via the
channel input mapping registers. This allows for flexibility in processing. The default settings
of these registers map each I2S input channel to its corresponding processing channel.

108/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility

7.3 Configuration register C (addr 0x02)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Reserved Reserved CSZ3 CSZ2 CSZ1 CSZ0 OM1 OM0
1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1

7.3.1 FFX compensating pulse size register

Table 107. FFX compensating pulse size bits


Bit R/W RST Name Description

2 R/W 1 CSZ0
3 R/W 1 CSZ1 When OM[1,0] = 11, this register determines the size
of the FFX compensating pulse from 0 clock ticks to
4 R/W 1 CSZ2 15 clock periods.
5 R/W 0 CSZ3

Table 6:

Table 108. Compensating pulse size


CSZ[3:0] Compensating pulse size

0000 0 ns (0 ticks) compensating pulse size


0001 20 ns (1 tick) clock period compensating pulse size
… …
1111 300 ns (15 ticks) clock period compensating pulse size

7.4 Configuration register D (addr 0x03)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
SME ZDE Reserved BQL PSL DSPB Reserved Reserved
0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0

7.4.1 DSP bypass

Table 109. DSP bypass


Bit R/W RST Name Description

0: Normal operation
2 R/W 0 DSPB
1: Bypass of biquad and bass/treble functions

Setting the DSPB bit bypasses the EQ function of the STA380BW.

DocID024543 Rev 1 109/162


Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility STA380BW

7.4.2 Post-scale link

Table 110. Post-scale link


Bit R/W RST Name Description

0: Each channel uses individual post-scale value


3 R/W 1 PSL
1: Each channel uses channel 1 post-scale value

Post-scale functionality can be used for power supply error correction. For multi-channel
applications running off the same power supply, the post-scale values can be linked to the
value of channel 1 for ease of use and in order to update the values faster.

7.4.3 Biquad coefficient link

Table 111. Biquad coefficient link


Bit R/W RST Name Description

0: Each channel uses coefficient values


4 R/W 1 BQL
1: Each channel uses channel 1 coefficient values

For ease of use, all channels can use the biquad coefficients loaded into the channel-1
coefficient RAM space by setting the BQL bit to 1. Therefore, any EQ updates only have to
be performed once.

7.4.4 Zero-detect mute enable

Table 112. Zero-detect mute enable


Bit R/W RST Name Description

Setting of 1 enables the automatic zero-detect mute


6 R/W 0 ZDE
Setting of 0 disables the automatic zero-detect mute

Refer to 7.24: Enhanced zero-detect mute and input level measurement (address 0x50-
0x54, 0x2E, 0x2F and 0x5E).

7.4.5 Submix mode enable

Table 113. Submix mode enable


Bit R/W RST Name Description

0: Submix into left/right disabled


7 R/W 0 SME
1: Submix into left/right enabled

7.5 Configuration register E (addr 0x04)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
SVE ZCE Reserved PWMS AME NSBW Reserved Reserved
1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

110/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility

7.5.1 Noise-shaper bandwidth selection

Table 114. Noise-shaper bandwidth selection


Bit R/W RST Name Description

1: Third order NS
2 R/W 0 NSBW
0: Fourth order NS

7.5.2 AM mode enable

Table 115. AM mode enable


Bit R/W RST Name Description

0: Normal FFX operation


3 R/W 0 AME
1: AM reduction mode FFX operation

The STA380BW features an FFX processing mode that minimizes the amount of noise
generated in the frequency range of AM radio. This mode is intended for use when FFX is
operating in a device with an active AM tuner. The SNR of the FFX processing is reduced to
approximately 83 dB in this mode, which is still greater than the SNR of AM radio.

7.5.3 PWM speed mode

Table 116. PWM speed mode


Bit R/W RST Name Description

0: Normal speed (384 kHz) all channels


4 R/W 0 PWMS 1: Odd speed (341.3 kHz) all channels. Not suitable for
binary BTL mode.

7.5.4 Zero-crossing enable

Table 117. Zero-crossing enable


Bit R/W RST Name Description

‘1’: Volume adjustments only occur at digital zero-crossing


6 R/W 0 ZCE
‘0’: Volume adjustments occur immediately

The ZCE bit enables zero-crossing adjustment. When volume is adjusted on digital zero-
crossing, no clicks are audible.

7.5.5 Soft volume update enable

Table 118. Soft volume update enable


Bit R/W RST Name Description

1: Volume adjustments ramp according to SVR settings


7 R/W 1 SVE
0: Volume adjustments occur immediately

DocID024543 Rev 1 111/162


Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility STA380BW

7.6 Configuration register F (addr 0x05)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
EAPD PWDN Reserved LDTE BCLE IDE OCFG1 OCFG0
0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0

7.6.1 Output configuration

Table 119. Output configuration


Bit R/W RST Name Description

0 R/W 0 OCFG0
Selects the output configuration
1 R/W 0 OCFG1

Table 120. Output configuration engine selection


OCFG[1:0] Output configuration PBTL enable
2-channel (full-bridge) power, 2-channel data-out:
1A/1B  1A/1B
2A/2B  2A/2B
00 No
LineOut1  3A/3B
LineOut2  4A/4B
Line Out configuration determined by LOC register
2(half-bridge).1(full-bridge) on-board power:
1A  1A Binary 0 °
2A  1B Binary 90°
01 No
3A/3B  2A/2B Binary 45°
1A/B  3A/B Binary 0°
2A/B  4A/B Binary 90°
2-channel (full-bridge) power, 1-channel FFX:
1A/1B  1A/1B
10 2A/2B  2A/2B No
3A/3B  3A/3B
EAPDEXT and TWARNEXT active
1-channel mono-parallel:
3A  1A/1B w/ C3BO 45°
11 3B  2A/2B w/ C3BO 45° Yes
1A/1B  3A/3B
2A/2B  4A/4B

Note: To the left of the arrow is the processing channel. When using channel output mapping, any
of the three processing channel outputs can be used for any of the three inputs.

112/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility

Figure 33. OCFG = 00 (default value)

Half OUT1A
Bridge

Channel 1
Half
Bridge OUT1B

Half OUT2A
Bridge
Channel 2

Half
Bridge OUT2B

OUT3A LineOut1
OUT3B LPF

OUT4A LineOut2
OUT4B LPF

Figure 34. OCFG = 01

Half Channel 1
Bridge
OUT1A

Half Channel 2
Bridge OUT1B

Half OUT2A
Bridge
Channel 3

Half
Bridge OUT2B

Figure 35. OCFG = 10


Half OUT1A
Bridge

Channel 1
Half
Bridge OUT1B

Half OUT2A
Bridge
Channel 2

Half
Bridge OUT2B

OUT3A
OUT3B
Power Channel 3
Device
EAPD

DocID024543 Rev 1 113/162


Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility STA380BW

Figure 36. OCFG = 11


OUT1A
Half
Bridge

Half
OUT1B
Bridge
Channel 3

Half
Bridge OUT2A

Half
Bridge OUT2B

OUT3A
Channel 1
OUT3B

OUT4A
Channel 2
OUT4B

The STA380BW can be configured to support different output configurations. For each
PWM output channel a PWM slot is defined. A PWM slot is always 1 / (8 * fs) seconds
length. The PWM slot defines the maximum extension for the PWM rising and falling edge,
that is, the rising edge as well as the falling edge cannot range outside the PWM slot
boundaries.

Figure 37. Output mapping scheme

FFX1A
OUT1A OUT1A
FFX1 B

FFX2 A OUT1B OUT1B


TM FFX 2B
FFX ™ Power
modulator FFX3 A OUT2A Bridge OUT2A
FFX3B

FFX4 A OUT2B OUT2B


FFX 4B

REMAP
OUT3A

OUT3B

OUT4A

OUT4B

114/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility

For each configuration the PWM signals from the digital driver are mapped in different ways
to the power stage:

2.0 channels, two full-bridges (OCFG = 00)


 FFX1A -> OUT1A
 FFX1B -> OUT1B
 FFX2A -> OUT2A
 FFX2B -> OUT2B
 FFX3A -> OUT3A
 FFX3B -> OUT3B
 FFX4A -> OUT4A
 FFX4B -> OUT4B
 FFX1A/1B configured as C1B0 (default: ternary)
 FFX2A/2B configured as C2B0 (default: ternary)
 FFX3A/3B configured as C3B0 (default: ternary) line out
 FFX4A/4B configured as C4B0 (default: ternary) line out
On channel 3 line out (LOC bits = 00) the same data as channel 1 processing is sent. On
channel 4 line out (LOC bits = 00) the same data as channel 2 processing is sent. In this
configuration, neither volume control nor EQ has any effect on channels 3 and 4.
In this configuration the PWM slot phase is the following as shown in Figure 38.

Figure 38. 2.0 channels (OCFG = 00) PWM slots

OUT1A

OUT1B

OUT2A

OUT2B

OUT3A

OUT3B

OUT4A

OUT4B

DocID024543 Rev 1 115/162


Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility STA380BW

2.1 channels, two half-bridges + one full-bridge (OCFG = 01)


 FFX1A -> OUT1A
 FFX2A -> OUT1B
 FFX3A -> OUT2A
 FFX3B -> OUT2B
 FFX1A -> OUT3A
 FFX1B -> OUT3B
 FFX2A -> OUT4A
 FFX2B -> OUT4B
 FFX1A/1B configured as binary
 FFX2A/2B configured as binary
 FFX3A/3B configured as binary
 FFX4A/4B is not used
In this configuration, channel 3 has full control (volume, EQ, etc…). On OUT3/OUT4
channels channel 1 and channel 2 PWM are replicated.
In this configuration the PWM slot phase is the following as shown in Figure 39.

Figure 39. 2.1 channels (OCFG = 01) PWM slots

OUT1A

OUT1B

OUT2A

OUT2B

OUT3A

OUT3B

OUT4A

OUT4B

116/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility

2.1 channels, two full-bridges + one external full-bridge (OCFG = 10)


 FFX1A -> OUT1A
 FFX1B -> OUT1B
 FFX2A -> OUT2A
 FFX2B -> OUT2B
 FFX3A -> OUT3A
 FFX3B -> OUT3B
 EAPD -> OUT4A
 TWARN -> OUT4B
 FFX1A/1B configured as C1B0 (default: ternary)
 FFX2A/2B configured as C2B0 (default: ternary)
 FFX3A/3B configured as C3B0 (default: ternary)
 FFX4A/4B is not used
In this configuration, channel 3 has full control (volume, EQ, etc…). On OUT4 channel the
external bridge control signals are muxed.
In this configuration the PWM slot phase is the following as shown in Figure 40.

Figure 40. 2.1 channels (OCFG = 10) PWM slots

OUT1A

OUT1B

OUT2A

OUT2B

OUT3A

OUT3B

DocID024543 Rev 1 117/162


Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility STA380BW

7.6.2 Invalid input detect mute enable

Table 121. Invalid input detect mute enable


Bit R/W RST Name Description

2 R/W 1 IDE Setting of 1 enables the automatic invalid input detect mute

Setting the IDE bit enables this function, which looks at the input I2S data and automatically
mutes if the signals are perceived as invalid.

7.6.3 Binary output mode clock loss detection

Table 122. Binary output mode clock loss detection


Bit R/W RST Name Description

3 R/W 1 BCLE Binary output mode clock loss detection enable

This bit detects loss of input MCLK in binary mode and will output 50% duty cycle.

7.6.4 LRCK double trigger protection

Table 123. LRCK double trigger protection


Bit R/W RST Name Description

4 R/W 1 LDTE LRCLK double trigger protection enable

This bit actively prevents double triggering of LRCLK.

7.6.5 IC power-down

Table 124. IC power-down


Bit R/W RST Name Description

0: IC power-down low-power condition


6 R/W 1 PWDN
1: IC normal operation

The PWDN register is used to place the IC in a low-power state. When PWDN is written
as 0, the output begins a soft-mute. After the mute condition is reached, EAPD is asserted
to power down the power stage, then the master clock to all internal hardware except the
I2C block is gated. This places the IC in a very low power consumption state.

7.6.6 External amplifier power-down

Table 125. External amplifier power-down


Bit R/W RST Name Description

0: External power stage power-down active


7 R/W 0 EAPD
1: Normal operation

118/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility

The EAPD register directly disables/enables the internal power circuitry.


When EAPD = 0, the internal power section is placed in a low-power state (disabled). This
register also controls the EAPD/FFX4B output pin when OCFG = 10.

7.7 Volume control registers (addr 0x06 - 0x0A)

7.7.1 Mute/line output configuration register

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
LOC1 LOC0 Reserved BQBALL C3M C2M C1M MMUTE
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Table 126. Line output configuration


LOC[1:0] Line output configuration

00 Line output fixed - no volume, no EQ


01 Line output variable - CH3 volume effects line output, no EQ
10 Line output variable with EQ - CH3 volume effects line output
11 Reserved

Line output is only active when OCFG = 00. In this case LOC determines the line output
configuration. The source of the line output is always channel 1 and 2 inputs.

Bit R/W RST Name Description

Global biquad bypass


4 R/W 0 BQBALL 0: Biquad filters active
1: All the biquad filters are bypassed (pass-through)

Table 127. Mute configuration


Bit R/W RST Name Description

Channel 3 mute
3 R/W 0 C3M 0 - No mute condition. It is possible to set the channel volume
1 - Channel 3 in hardware mute
Channel 2 mute
2 R/W 0 C2M 0 - No mute condition. It is possible to set the channel volume
1 - Channel 2 in hardware mute
Channel 1 mute
1 R/W 0 C1M 0 - No mute condition. It is possible to set the channel volume
1 - Channel 1 in hardware mute
Master mute
0 R/W 0 MMUTE 0 - Normal operation
1 - All channels are in mute condition

DocID024543 Rev 1 119/162


Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility STA380BW

7.7.2 Master volume register

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
MVOL[7:0]
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

7.7.3 Channel 1 volume

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
CH1VOL[7:0]
0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0

7.7.4 Channel 2 volume

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
CH2VOL[7:0]
0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0

7.7.5 Channel 3 / line output volume

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
CH3VOL[7:0]
0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0

The volume structure of the STA380BW consists of individual volume registers for each
channel and a master volume register that provides an offset to each channel’s volume
setting. The individual channel volumes are adjustable in 0.5 dB steps from +48 dB to
-80 dB.
As an example if CH3VOL = 0x00 or +48 dB and MVOL = 0x18 or -12 dB, then the total gain
for channel 3 = +36 dB.
The master mute, when set to 1, mutes all channels at once, whereas the individual channel
mute (CxM) mutes only that channel. Both the master mute and the channel mutes provide
a “soft mute” with the volume ramping down to mute in 4096 samples from the maximum
volume setting at the internal processing rate (approximately 96 kHz).
A “hard (instantaneous) mute” can be obtained by programming a value of 0xFF (255) to
any channel volume register or the master volume register. When volume offsets are
provided via the master volume register, any channel whose total volume is less than -80 dB
is muted.
All changes in volume take place at zero-crossings when ZCE = 1 (Configuration register E
(addr 0x04)) on a per-channel basis as this creates the smoothest possible volume
transitions. When ZCE = 0, volume updates occur immediately.

120/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility

Table 128. Master volume offset as a function of MVOL[7:0]


MVOL[7:0] Volume offset from channel value

00000000 (0x00) 0 dB
00000001 (0x01) -0.5 dB
00000010 (0x02) -1 dB
… …
01001100 (0x4C) -38 dB
… …
11111110 (0xFE) -127.5 dB
11111111 (0xFF) Hard master mute

Table 129. Channel volume as a function of CxVOL[7:0]


CxVOL[7:0] Volume

00000000 (0x00) +48 dB


00000001 (0x01) +47.5 dB
00000010 (0x02) +47 dB
… …
01011111 (0x5F) +0.5 dB
01100000 (0x60) 0 dB
01100001 (0x61) -0.5 dB
… …
11010111 (0xD7) -59.5 dB
11011000 (0xD8) -60 dB
11011001 (0xD9) -61 dB
11011010 (0xDA) -62 dB
… …
11101100 (0xEC) -80 dB
11101101 (0xED) Hard channel mute
… …
11111111 (0xFF) Hard channel mute

DocID024543 Rev 1 121/162


Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility STA380BW

7.8 Audio preset registers (addr 0x0C)

7.8.1 Audio preset register (addr 0x0C)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
XO3 XO2 XO1 XO0 AMAM2 AMAM1 AMAM0 AMAME
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

7.8.2 AM interference frequency switching

Table 130. AM interference frequency switching bits


Bit R/W RST Name Description

Audio preset AM enable


0 R/W 0 AMAME 0: switching frequency determined by PWMS setting
1: switching frequency determined by AMAM settings

Table 131. Audio preset AM switching frequency selection


AMAM[2:0] 48 kHz/96 kHz input fs 44.1 kHz/88.2 kHz input fs

000 0.535 MHz - 0.720 MHz 0.535 MHz - 0.670 MHz


001 0.721 MHz - 0.900 MHz 0.671 MHz - 0.800 MHz
010 0.901 MHz - 1.100 MHz 0.801 MHz - 1.000 MHz
011 1.101 MHz - 1.300 MHz 1.001 MHz - 1.180 MHz
100 1.301 MHz - 1.480 MHz 1.181 MHz - 1.340 MHz
101 1.481 MHz - 1.600 MHz 1.341 MHz - 1.500 MHz
110 1.601 MHz - 1.700 MHz 1.501 MHz - 1.700 MHz

7.8.3 Bass management crossover

Table 132. Bass management crossover


Bit R/W RST Name Description

4 R/W 0 XO0
Selects the bass management crossover frequency.
5 R/W 0 XO1 A 1st-order high-pass filter (channels 1 and 2) or a
6 R/W 0 XO2 2nd-order low-pass filter (channel 3) at the selected
frequency is performed.
7 R/W 0 XO3

122/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility

Table 133. Bass management crossover frequency


XO[3:0] Crossover frequency

0000 User-defined
0001 80 Hz
0010 100 Hz
0011 120 Hz
0100 140 Hz
0101 160 Hz
0110 180 Hz
0111 200 Hz
1000 220 Hz
1001 240 Hz
1010 260 Hz
1011 280 Hz
1100 300 Hz
1101 320 Hz
1110 340 Hz
1111 360 Hz

7.9 Channel configuration registers (addr 0x0E - 0x10)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C1OM1 C1OM0 C1LS1 C1LS0 C1BO C1VPB C1EQBP C1TCB
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C2OM1 C2OM0 C2LS1 C2LS0 C2BO C2VPB C2EQBP C2TCB
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C3OM1 C3OM0 C3LS1 C3LS0 C3BO C3VPB Reserved Reserved
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

7.9.1 Tone control bypass


Tone control (bass/treble) can be bypassed on a per-channel basis for channels 1 and 2.

Table 134. Tone control bypass


CxTCB Mode

0 Perform tone control on channel x - normal operation


1 Bypass tone control on channel x

DocID024543 Rev 1 123/162


Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility STA380BW

7.9.2 EQ bypass
EQ control can be bypassed on a per-channel basis for channels 1 and 2. If EQ control is
bypassed on a given channel, the prescale and all filters (biquads, bass, treble in any
combination) are bypassed for that channel.

Table 135. EQ bypass


CxEQBP Mode

0 Perform EQ on channel x - normal operation


1 Bypass EQ on channel x

7.9.3 Volume bypass


Each channel contains an individual channel volume bypass. If a particular channel has
volume bypassed via the CxVBP = 1 register, then only the channel volume setting for that
particular channel affects the volume setting, the master volume setting will not affect that
channel.

Table 136. Volume bypass register


CxVBP Mode

0 Normal volume operations


1 Volume is bypassed

7.9.4 Binary output enable registers


Each individual channel output can be set to output a binary PWM stream. In this mode
output A of a channel is considered the positive output and output B is the negative inverse.

Table 137. Binary output enable registers


CxBO Mode

0 FFX 3-state output - normal operation


1 Binary output

7.9.5 Limiter select


Limiter selection can be made on a per-channel basis according to the channel limiter select
bits. CxLS bits are considered in case of dual-band DRC and EQDRC usage (7.16.1).

Table 138. Channel limiter mapping as a function of CxLS bits


CxLS[1:0] Channel limiter mapping

00 Channel has limiting disabled


01 Channel is mapped to limiter #1
10 Channel is mapped to limiter #2

124/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility

7.9.6 Output mapping


Output mapping can be performed on a per-channel basis according to the CxOM channel
output mapping bits. Each input into the output configuration engine can receive data from
any of the three processing channel outputs.
.

Table 139. Channel output mapping as a function of CxOM bits


CxOM[1:0] Channel x output source from

00 Channel1
01 Channel 2
10 Channel 3

7.10 Tone control register (addr 0x11)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
TTC3 TTC2 TTC1 TTC0 BTC3 BTC2 BTC1 BTC0
0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1

7.10.1 Tone control

Table 140. Tone control boost/cut as a function of BTC and TTC bits
BTC[3:0]/TTC[3:0] Boost/cut

0000 -12 dB
0001 -12 dB
… …
0111 -4 dB
0110 -2 dB
0111 0 dB
1000 +2 dB
1001 +4 dB
… …
1101 +12 dB
1110 +12 dB
1111 +12 dB

DocID024543 Rev 1 125/162


Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility STA380BW

7.11 Dynamic control registers (addr 0x12 - 0x15)

7.11.1 Limiter 1 attack/release rate

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
L1A3 L1A2 L1A1 L1A0 L1R3 L1R2 L1R1 L1R0
0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0

7.11.2 Limiter 1 attack/release threshold

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
L1AT3 L1AT2 L1AT1 L1AT0 L1RT3 L1RT2 L1RT1 L1RT0
0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1

7.11.3 Limiter 2 attack/release rate

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
L2A3 L2A2 L2A1 L2A0 L2R3 L2R2 L2R1 L2R0
0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0

7.11.4 Limiter 2 attack/release threshold

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
L2AT3 L2AT2 L2AT1 L2AT0 L2RT3 L2RT2 L2RT1 L2RT0
0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1

The STA380BW includes two independent limiter blocks (not to be mistaken with the
STCompressorTM, for further details about this feature please refer to Section 4.2). The
purpose of the limiters is to automatically reduce the dynamic range of a recording to
prevent the outputs from clipping in anticlipping mode or to actively reduce the dynamic
range for a better listening environment such as a nighttime listening mode which is often
needed for DVDs. The two modes are selected via the DRC bit in Configuration register E
(addr 0x04) on page 110. Each channel can be mapped to either limiter or not mapped,
meaning that the channel will clip when 0 dBfs is exceeded. Each limiter looks at the
present value of each channel that is mapped to it, selects the maximum absolute value of
all these channels, performs the limiting algorithm on that value, and then, if needed, adjusts
the gain of the mapped channels in unison.
The limiter attack thresholds are determined by the LxAT registers if the EATHx[7] bits are
set to 0, else the thresholds are determined by EATHx[6:0]. It is recommended in
anticlipping mode to set this to 0 dBfs, which corresponds to the maximum unclipped output
power of an FFX amplifier. Since gain can be added digitally within the STA380BW, it is
possible to exceed 0 dBfs or any other LxAT setting. When this occurs, the limiter, when
active, automatically starts reducing the gain. The rate at which the gain is reduced when
the attack threshold is exceeded is dependent upon the attack rate register setting for that
limiter. Gain reduction occurs on a peak-detect algorithm. Setting the EATHx[7] bits to 1
selects the anticlipping mode.
The limiter release thresholds are determined by the LxRT registers if the ERTHx[7] bits are
set to 0, else the thresholds are determined by ERTHx[6:0]. Settings the ERTHx[7] bits to 1

126/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility

automatically selects the anticlipping mode. The release of the limiter, when the gain is
again increased, is dependent on an RMS-detect algorithm. The output of the volume/limiter
block is passed through an RMS filter. The output of this filter is compared to the release
threshold, determined by the release threshold register. When the RMS filter output falls
below the release threshold, the gain is again increased at a rate dependent upon the
release rate register. The gain can never be increased past its set value and, therefore, the
release only occurs if the limiter has already reduced the gain. The release threshold value
can be used to set what is effectively a minimum dynamic range, this is helpful as
overlimiting can reduce the dynamic range to virtually zero and cause program material to
sound “lifeless”.
In AC mode, the attack and release thresholds are set relative to full-scale. In DRC mode,
the attack threshold is set relative to the maximum volume setting of the channels mapped
to that limiter, and the release threshold is set relative to the maximum volume setting plus
the attack threshold.

DocID024543 Rev 1 127/162


Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility STA380BW

Figure 41. Basic limiter and volume flow diagram

RMS
Limiter

Gain / Vo lume
+

In p ut Outp ut
Gain Atten uatio n Saturatio n

Table 141. Limiter attack rate as a Table 142. Limiter release rate as a
function of LxA bits function of LxR bits
LxA[3:0] Attack rate dB/ms LxR[3:0] Release rate dB/ms

0000 3.1584 0000 0.5116


Fast Fast
0001 2.7072 0001 0.1370
0010 2.2560 0010 0.0744
0011 1.8048 0011 0.0499
0100 1.3536 0100 0.0360
0101 0.9024 0101 0.0299
0110 0.4512 0110 0.0264
0111 0.2256 0111 0.0208
1000 0.1504 1000 0.0198
1001 0.1123 1001 0.0172
1010 0.0902 1010 0.0147
1011 0.0752 1011 0.0137
1100 0.0645 1100 0.0134
1101 0.0564 1101 0.0117
1110 0.0501 1110 0.0110
Slow Slow
1111 0.0451 1111 0.0104

128/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility

Anticlipping mode

Table 143. Limiter attack threshold as Table 144. Limiter release threshold as
a function of LxAT bits (AC mode) a function of LxRT bits (AC mode)
LxAT[3:0] AC (dB relative to fs) LxRT[3:0] AC (dB relative to fs)

0000 -12 0000 -


0001 -10 0001 -29 dB
0010 -8 0010 -20 dB
0011 -6 0011 -16 dB
0100 -4 0100 -14 dB
0101 -2 0101 -12 dB
0110 0 0110 -10 dB
0111 +2 0111 -8 dB
1000 +3 1000 -7 dB
1001 +4 1001 -6 dB
1010 +5 1010 -5 dB
1011 +6 1011 -4 dB
1100 +7 1100 -3 dB
1101 +8 1101 -2 dB
1110 +9 1110 -1 dB
1111 +10 1111 -0 dB

DocID024543 Rev 1 129/162


Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility STA380BW

Dynamic range compression mode

Table 145. Limiter attack threshold Table 146. Limiter release threshold
as a function of LxAT bits as a function of LxRT bits
(DRC mode) (DRC mode)
DRC (db relative to volume +
LxAT[3:0] DRC (dB relative to volume) LxRT[3:0]
LxAT)

0000 -31 0000 -


0001 -29 0001 -38 dB
0010 -27 0010 -36 dB
0011 -25 0011 -33 dB
0100 -23 0100 -31 dB
0101 -21 0101 -30 dB
0110 -19 0110 -28 dB
0111 -17 0111 -26 dB
1000 -16 1000 -24 dB
1001 -15 1001 -22 dB
1010 -14 1010 -20 dB
1011 -13 1011 -18 dB
1100 -12 1100 -15 dB
1101 -10 1101 -12 dB
1110 -7 1110 -9 dB
1111 -4 1111 -6 dB

7.11.5 Limiter 1 extended attack threshold (addr 0x32)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
EATHEN1 EATH1[6] EATH1[5] EATH1[4] EATH1[3] EATH1[2] EATH1[1] EATH1[0]
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

The extended attack threshold value is determined as follows:


attack threshold = -12 + EATH1 / 4
To enable this feature, the EATHEN1 bit must be set to 1.

7.11.6 Limiter 1 extended release threshold (addr 0x33)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
ERTHEN1 ERTH1[6] ERTH1[5] ERTH1[4] ERTH1[3] ERTH1[2] ERTH1[1] ERTH1[0]
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

The extended release threshold value is determined as follows:


release threshold = -12 + ERTH1 / 4

130/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility

To enable this feature, the ERTHEN2 bit must be set to 1.

7.11.7 Limiter 2 extended attack threshold (addr 0x34)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
EATHEN2 EATH2[6] EATH2[5] EATH2[4] EATH2[3] EATH2[2] EATH2[1] EATH2[0]
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

The extended attack threshold value is determined as follows:


attack threshold = -12 + EATH2 / 4
To enable this feature, the EATHEN2 bit must be set to 1.

7.11.8 Limiter 2 extended release threshold (addr 0x35)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
ERTHEN2 ERTH2[6] ERTH2[5] ERTH2[4] ERTH2[3] ERTH2[2] ERTH2[1] ERTH2[0]
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

The extended release threshold value is determined as follows:


release threshold = -12 + ERTH2 / 4
To enable this feature, the ERTHEN2 bit must be set to 1.
Note: Attack/release threshold step is 0.125 dB in the range -12 dB to 0 dB.

7.12 User-defined coefficient control registers (addr 0x16 - 0x26)

7.12.1 Coefficient address register

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Reserved Reserved CFA5 CFA4 CFA3 CFA2 CFA1 CFA0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

7.12.2 Coefficient b1 data register bits 23:16

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C1B23 C1B22 C1B21 C1B20 C1B19 C1B18 C1B17 C1B16
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

7.12.3 Coefficient b1 data register bits 15:8

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C1B15 C1B14 C1B13 C1B12 C1B11 C1B10 C1B9 C1B8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

DocID024543 Rev 1 131/162


Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility STA380BW

7.12.4 Coefficient b1 data register bits 7:0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C1B7 C1B6 C1B5 C1B4 C1B3 C1B2 C1B1 C1B0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

7.12.5 Coefficient b2 data register bits 23:16

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C2B23 C2B22 C2B21 C2B20 C2B19 C2B18 C2B17 C2B16
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

7.12.6 Coefficient b2 data register bits 15:8

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C2B15 C2B14 C2B13 C2B12 C2B11 C2B10 C2B9 C2B8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

7.12.7 Coefficient b2 data register bits 7:0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C2B7 C2B6 C2B5 C2B4 C2B3 C2B2 C2B1 C2B0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

7.12.8 Coefficient a1 data register bits 23:16

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C1B23 C1B22 C1B21 C1B20 C1B19 C1B18 C1B17 C1B16
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

7.12.9 Coefficient a1 data register bits 15:8

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C3B15 C3B14 C3B13 C3B12 C3B11 C3B10 C3B9 C3B8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

7.12.10 Coefficient a1 data register bits 7:0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C3B7 C3B6 C3B5 C3B4 C3B3 C3B2 C3B1 C3B0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

7.12.11 Coefficient a2 data register bits 23:16

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C4B23 C4B22 C4B21 C4B20 C4B19 C4B18 C4B17 C4B16
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

132/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility

7.12.12 Coefficient a2 data register bits 15:8

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C4B15 C4B14 C4B13 C4B12 C4B11 C4B10 C4B9 C4B8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

7.12.13 Coefficient a2 data register bits 7:0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C4B7 C4B6 C4B5 C4B4 C4B3 C4B2 C4B1 C4B0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

7.12.14 Coefficient b0 data register bits 23:16

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C5B23 C5B22 C5B21 C5B20 C5B19 C5B18 C5B17 C5B16
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

7.12.15 Coefficient b0 data register bits 15:8

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C5B15 C5B14 C5B13 C5B12 C5B11 C5B10 C5B9 C5B8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

7.12.16 Coefficient b0 data register bits 7:0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
C5B7 C5B6 C5B5 C5B4 C5B3 C5B2 C5B1 C5B0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

7.12.17 Coefficient write/read control register

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Reserved RA R1 WA W1
0 0 0 0 0

Coefficients for user-defined EQ, mixing, scaling, bass management and STCompressorTM
(see Section 4.2) are handled internally in the STA380BW via RAM. Access to this RAM is
available to the user via an I2C register interface. A collection of I2C registers are dedicated
to this function. One contains a coefficient base address, five sets of three store the values
of the 24-bit coefficients to be written or that were read, and one contains bits used to
control the write/read of the coefficient(s) to/from RAM.
Note: The read and write operation on RAM coefficients works only if LRCKI (pin 29) is switching.

DocID024543 Rev 1 133/162


Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility STA380BW

Reading a coefficient from RAM


1. Write 6 bits of the address to I2C register 0x16.
2. Write 1 to the R1 bit in I2C address 0x26.
3. Read the top 8 bits of the coefficient in I2C address 0x17.
4. Read the middle 8 bits of the coefficient in I2C address 0x18.
5. Read the bottom 8 bits of the coefficient in I2C address 0x19.

Reading a set of coefficients from RAM


1. Write 6 bits of the address to I2C register 0x16.
2. Write 1 to the RA bit in I2C address 0x26.
3. Read the top 8 bits of the coefficient in I2C address 0x17.
4. Read the middle 8 bits of the coefficient in I2C address 0x18.
5. Read the bottom 8 bits of the coefficient in I2C address 0x19.
6. Read the top 8 bits of coefficient b2 in I2C address 0x1A.
7. Read the middle 8 bits of coefficient b2 in I2C address 0x1B.
8. Read the bottom 8 bits of coefficient b2 in I2C address 0x1C.
9. Read the top 8 bits of coefficient a1 in I2C address 0x1D.
10. Read the middle 8 bits of coefficient a1 in I2C address 0x1E.
11. Read the bottom 8 bits of coefficient a1 in I2C address 0x1F.
12. Read the top 8 bits of coefficient a2 in I2C address 0x20.
13. Read the middle 8 bits of coefficient a2 in I2C address 0x21.
14. Read the bottom 8 bits of coefficient a2 in I2C address 0x22.
15. Read the top 8 bits of coefficient b0 in I2C address 0x23.
16. Read the middle 8 bits of coefficient b0 in I2C address 0x24.
17. Read the bottom 8 bits of coefficient b0 in I2C address 0x25.

Writing a single coefficient to RAM


1. Write 6 bits of the address to I2C register 0x16.
2. Write the top 8 bits of the coefficient in I2C address 0x17.
3. Write the middle 8 bits of the coefficient in I2C address 0x18.
4. Write the bottom 8 bits of the coefficient in I2C address 0x19.
5. Write 1 to the W1 bit in I2C address 0x26.

134/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility

Writing a set of coefficients to RAM


1. Write 6 bits of the starting address to I2C register 0x16.
2. Write the top 8 bits of coefficient b1 in I2C address 0x17.
3. Write the middle 8 bits of coefficient b1 in I2C address 0x18.
4. Write the bottom 8 bits of coefficient b1 in I2C address 0x19.
5. Write the top 8 bits of coefficient b2 in I2C address 0x1A.
6. Write the middle 8 bits of coefficient b2 in I2C address 0x1B.
7. Write the bottom 8 bits of coefficient b2 in I2C address 0x1C.
8. Write the top 8 bits of coefficient a1 in I2C address 0x1D.
9. Write the middle 8 bits of coefficient a1 in I2C address 0x1E.
10. Write the bottom 8 bits of coefficient a1 in I2C address 0x1F.
11. Write the top 8 bits of coefficient a2 in I2C address 0x20.
12. Write the middle 8 bits of coefficient a2 in I2C address 0x21.
13. Write the bottom 8 bits of coefficient a2 in I2C address 0x22.
14. Write the top 8 bits of coefficient b0 in I2C address 0x23.
15. Write the middle 8 bits of coefficient b0 in I2C address 0x24.
16. Write the bottom 8 bits of coefficient b0 in I2C address 0x25.
17. Write 1 to the WA bit in I2C address 0x26.
The mechanism for writing a set of coefficients to RAM provides a method of updating the
five coefficients corresponding to a given biquad (filter) simultaneously to avoid possible
unpleasant acoustic side effects. When using this technique, the 6-bit address specifies the
address of the biquad b1 coefficient (for example, 0, 5, 10, 20, 35 decimal), and the
STA380BW generates the RAM addresses as offsets from this base value to write the
complete set of coefficient data.

DocID024543 Rev 1 135/162


Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility STA380BW

7.12.18 User-defined EQ
The STA380BW can be programmed for four EQ filters (biquads) per each of the two input
channels. The biquads use the following equation:
Y[n] = 2 * (b0 / 2) * X[n] + 2 * (b1 / 2) * X[n-1] + b2 * X[n-2] - 2 * (a1 / 2) * Y[n-1] - a2 * Y[n-2]
= b0 * X[n] + b1 * X[n-1] + b2 * X[n-2] - a1 * Y[n-1] - a2 * Y[n-2]
where Y[n] represents the output and X[n] represents the input. Multipliers are 24-bit signed
fractional multipliers, with coefficient values in the range of 0x800000 (-1) to 0x7FFFFF
(0.9999998808).
Coefficients stored in the user-defined coefficient RAM are referenced in the following
manner:
CxHy0 = b1 / 2
CxHy1 = b2
CxHy2 = -a1 / 2
CxHy3 = -a2
CxHy4 = b0 / 2
where x represents the channel and y the biquad number. For example, C2H41 is the b2
coefficient in the fourth biquad for channel 2.
Additionally, the STA380BW can be programmed for a high-pass filter (processing
channels 1 and 2) and a low-pass filter (processing channel 3) to be used for bass
management crossover when the XO setting is 000 (user-defined). Both of these filters,
when defined by the user (rather than using the preset crossover filters), are second order
filters that use the biquad equation given above. They are loaded into the C12H0-4 and
C3Hy0-4 areas of RAM noted in Table 146.
Channel 1 and channel 2 biquads use by default the extended coefficient range (-4, +4);
Xover filters use only the standard coefficients range (-1, +1).
By default, all user-defined filters are pass-through where all coefficients are set to 0, except
the channel 1 and 2 b0/2 coefficient which is set to 0x100000 (representing 0.5) and xover
b0/2 coefficient which is set to 0x400000 (representing 0.5).

7.12.19 Pre-scale
The STA380BW provides a multiplication for each input channel for the purpose of scaling
the input prior to EQ. This pre-EQ scaling is accomplished by using a 24-bit signed
fractional multiplier, with 0x800000 = -1 and 0x7FFFFF = 0.9999998808. The scale factor
for this multiplication is loaded into RAM using the same I2C registers as the biquad
coefficients and the bass management. All channels can use the channel-1 pre-scale factor
by setting the biquad link bit. By default, all pre-scale factors are set to 0x7FFFFF.

7.12.20 Post-scale
The STA380BW provides one additional multiplication after the last interpolation stage and
the distortion compensation on each channel. This post-scaling is accomplished by using a
24-bit signed fractional multiplier, with 0x800000 = -1 and 0x7FFFFF = 0.9999998808. The
scale factor for this multiplication is loaded into RAM using the same I2C registers as the
biquad coefficients and the bass management. This post-scale factor can be used in
conjunction with an ADC-equipped microcontroller to perform power-supply error correction.
All channels can use the channel-1 post-scale factor by setting the post-scale link bit. By

136/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility

default, all post-scale factors are set to 0x7FFFFF. When line output is being used,
channel-3 post-scale will affect both channels 3 and 4.

Table 147. RAM block for biquads, mixing, scaling and bass management
Index (decimal) Index (hex) Description Coefficient Default
0 0x00 C1H10(b1/2) 0x000000
1 0x01 C1H11(b2) 0x000000
2 0x02 Channel 1 - Biquad 1 C1H12(a1/2) 0x000000
3 0x03 C1H13(a2) 0x000000
4 0x04 C1H14(b0/2) 0x400000
5 0x05 Channel 1 - Biquad 2 C1H20 0x000000
… … … … …
19 0x13 Channel 1 - Biquad 4 C1H44 0x400000
20 0x14 C2H10 0x000000
Channel 2 - Biquad 1
21 0x15 C2H11 0x000000
… … … … …
39 0x27 Channel 2 - Biquad 4 C2H44 0x400000
40 0x28 C12H0(b1/2) 0x000000
41 0x29 Channel 1/2 - Biquad 5 C12H1(b2) 0x000000
for XO = 000
42 0x2A C12H2(a1/2) 0x000000
High-pass 1st order filter
43 0x2B for XO000 C12H3(a2) 0x000000
44 0x2C C12H4(b0/2) 0x400000
45 0x2D C3H0(b1/2) 0x000000
46 0x2E Channel 3 - Biquad C3H1(b2) 0x000000
for XO = 000
47 0x2F C3H2(a1/2) 0x000000
Low-pass 2nd order filter
48 0x30 for XO000 C3H3(a2) 0x000000
49 0x31 C3H4(b0/2) 0x400000
50 0x32 Channel 1 - Pre-Scale C1PreS 0x7FFFFF
51 0x33 Channel 2 - Pre-Scale C2PreS 0x7FFFFF
52 0x34 Channel 1 - Post-Scale C1PstS 0x7FFFFF
53 0x35 Channel 2 - Post-Scale C2PstS 0x7FFFFF
54 0x36 Channel 3 - Post-Scale C3PstS 0x7FFFFF
55 0x37 Reserved Reserved 0x5A9DF7
56 0x38 Channel 1 - Mix 1 C1MX1 0x7FFFFF
57 0x39 Channel 1 - Mix 2 C1MX2 0x000000
58 0x3A Channel 2 - Mix 1 C2MX1 0x000000
59 0x3B Channel 2 - Mix 2 C2MX2 0x7FFFFF
60 0x3C Channel 3 - Mix 1 C3MX1 0x400000
61 0x3D Channel 3 - Mix 2 C3MX2 0x400000
62 0x3E UNUSED
63 0x3F UNUSED

DocID024543 Rev 1 137/162


Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility STA380BW

7.13 Fault-detect recovery constant registers (addr 0x2B - 0x2C)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
FDRC15 FDRC14 FDRC13 FDRC12 FDRC11 FDRC10 FDRC9 FDRC8
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
FDRC7 FDRC6 FDRC5 FDRC4 FDRC3 FDRC2 FDRC1 FDRC0
0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0

The FDRC bits specify the 16-bit fault-detect recovery time delay. When FAULT is asserted,
the TRISTATE output is immediately asserted low and held low for the time period specified
by this constant. A constant value of 0x0001 in this register is approximately 0.083 ms. The
default value of 0x300C gives approximately 1 sec.
0x0000 is a reserved value.

7.14 Device status register (addr 0x2D)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
PLLUL FAULT Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved

This read-only register provides fault and thermal-warning status information from the power
control block. Logic value 1 for faults or warning means normal state. Logic 0 means a fault
or warning detected on power bridge. The PLLUL = 1 means that the PLL is not locked.

Table 148. Status register bits


Bit R/W RST Name Description

0: PLL locked
7 R - PLLUL
1: PLL not locked
0: fault detected on power bridge
6 R - FAULT
1: normal operation

7.15 EQ coefficients configuration register (addr 0x31)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
XOB Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

The XOB bit can be used to bypass the crossover filters. Logic 1 means that the function is
not active. In this case, the high-pass crossover filter works as a pass-through on the data
path (b=0, all the other coefficients at logic 0 ) while the low-pass filter is configured to have
zero signal on channel 3 data processing (all the coefficients are at logic 0).

138/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility

7.16 Extended configuration register (addr 0x36)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
MDRCE Reserved PS48DB XAR1 XAR2 BQ5 BQ6 BQ7
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

The extended configuration register provides access to B2DRC and biquad 5, 6 and 7.

7.16.1 Dual-band DRC


The STA380BW device provides a dual-band DRC (B2DRC) on the left and right channel
data path, as depicted in Figure 42. The dual-band DRC is activated by setting MDRCE = 1.

Figure 42. B2DRC scheme

Channel 3
DRC 2
Volume

L
B2DRC
- Channel 1
Hi-pass XO
filter
+ Volume
DRC 1 +

B2DRC
Channel 2
R Hi-pass XO
filter - + Volume
DRC 1

Channel 3
Volume
DRC 2 +

The low-frequency information (LFE) is extracted from the left and right channels, removing
the high frequencies using a programmable biquad filter, and then computing the difference
with the original signal. Limiter 1 (DRC1) is then used to control the amplitude of the left/right
high-frequency components, while limiter 2 (DRC2) is used to control the low-frequency
components (see Chapter 7.11).
The cutoff frequency of the high-pass filters can be user-defined, XO[3:0] = 0, or selected
from the pre-defined values.
DRC1 and DRC2 are then used to independently limit L/R high frequencies and LFE
channel amplitude (see Chapter 7.11) as well as their volume control. To be noted that, in
this configuration, the dedicated channel 3 volume control can actually act as a bass-boost
enhancer as well (0.5 dB/step resolution).
The processed LFE channel is then recombined with the L and R channels in order to
reconstruct the 2.0 output signal.

DocID024543 Rev 1 139/162


Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility STA380BW

Sub-band decomposition
The sub-band decomposition for B2DRC can be configured specifying the cutoff frequency.
The cutoff frequency can be programmed in two ways, using the XO bits in register 0x0C, or
using the “user programmable” mode (coefficients stored in RAM addresses 0x28 to 0x31).
For the user-programmable mode, use the formulas below to compute the high-pass filters:

b0 = (1 + alpha) / 2 a0 = 1

b1 = -(1 + alpha) / 2 a1 = -alpha

b2 = 0 a2 = 0
where alpha = (1-sin(0))/cos(0), and 0 is the cutoff frequency.
A first-order filter is suggested to guarantee that for every 0 the corresponding low-pass
filter obtained as difference (as shown in Figure 26) will have a symmetric (relative to the HP
filter) frequency response, and the corresponding recombination after the DRC has low
ripple. Second-order filters can be used as well, but in this case the filter shape must be
carefully chosen to provide good low-pass response and minimum ripple recombination. For
second-order filters, it is not possible to give a closed formula to get the best coefficients,
but empirical adjustment should be done.

DRC settings
The DRC blocks used by B2DRC are the same as those described in Chapter 7.11. B2DRC
configure automatically the DRC blocks in anticlipping mode. Attack and release thresholds
can be selected using registers 0x32, 0x33, 0x34, 0x35, while attack and release rates are
configured by registers 0x12 and 0x14.

Band downmixing
The low-frequency band is down-mixed to the left and right channels at the B2DRC output.
Channel volume can be used to weight the bands recombination to fine-tune the overall
frequency response.

7.16.2 Extended post-scale range

Table 149. Extended post-scale range


PS48DB Mode

0 Post-scale value is applied as defined in coefficient RAM


Post-scale value is applied with +48 dB offset with respect to the
1
coefficient RAM value

Post-scale is an attenuation by default. When PS48DB is set to 1, a 48-dB offset is applied


to the coefficient RAM value, so post-scale can act as a gain too.

140/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility

7.16.3 Extended attack rate


The attack rate shown in Table 142 can be extended to provide up to an 8 dB/ms attack rate
on both limiters.

Table 150. Extended attack rate, limiter 1


XAR1 Mode

0 Limiter1 attack rate is configured using Table 142


1 Limiter1 attack rate is 8 dB/ms

Table 151. Extended attack rate, limiter 2


XAR2 Mode

0 Limiter2 attack rate is configured using Table 142


1 Limiter2 attack rate is 8 dB/ms

7.16.4 Extended BIQUAD selector


Bass and treble controls can be configured as user-defined filters when the equalization
coefficients link is activated (BQL = 1) and the corresponding BQx bit is set to 1.

Table 152. Extended biquad selector, biquad 5


BQ5 Mode

0 Reserved
1 User-defined biquad 5 coefficients are selected

Table 153. Extended biquad selector, biquad 6


BQ6 Mode

0 Pre-set bass filter selected as per Table 141


1 User-defined biquad 6 coefficients are selected

Table 154. Extended biquad selector, biquad 7


BQ7 Mode

0 Pre-set treble filter selected as per Table 141


1 User-defined biquad 7 coefficients are selected

When filters from the 5th to 7th are configured as user-programmable, the corresponding
coefficients are stored respectively in addresses 0x20-0x24 (BQ5), 0x25-0x29 (BQ6), 0x2A-
0x2E (BQ7) as given in Table 148.
Note: BQx bits are ignored if BQL = 0 or if DEMP = 1 (relevant for BQ5) or CxTCB = 1 (relevant for
BQ6 and BQ7).

DocID024543 Rev 1 141/162


Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility STA380BW

7.17 EQ soft volume configuration registers (addr 0x37 - 0x38)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Reserved Reserved SVUPE SVUP[4] SVUP[3] SVUP[2] SVUP[1] SVUP[0]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Reserved Reserved SVDWE SVDW4] SVDW[3] SVDW[2] SVDW[1] SVDW[0]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

The soft volume update has a fixed rate by default. Using register 0x37 and 0x38 it is
possible to override the default behavior, allowing different volume change rates.
It is also possible to independently define the fade-in (volume is increased) and fade-out
(volume is decreased) rates according to the desired behavior.

Table 155. Soft volume update enable, increase


SVUPE Mode

0 When volume is increased, use the default rate


1 When volume is increased, use the rates defined by SVUP[4:0].

When SVUPE = 1 the volume-up rate is defined by the SVUP[4:0] bits according to the
following formula:
volume-up rate = 48 / (N + 1) dB/ms
where N is the SVUP[4:0] value.

Table 156. Soft volume update enable, decrease


SVDWE Mode

0 When volume is decreased, use the default rate


1 When volume is decreased, use the rates defined by SVDW[4:0].

When SVDWE = 1 the volume-down rate is defined by the SVDW[4:0] bits according to the
following formula:
volume-down rate = 48 / (N + 1) dB/ms
where N is the SVDW[4:0] value.
Note: For volume-down rates greater than 6 dB/msec it is recommended to disable the CPWMEN
bit and ZCE bit in order to avoid any audible pop noise.

142/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility

7.18 Extra volume resolution configuration registers (address


0x3F; 0x40)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
VRESEN VRESTG C3VR[1] C3VR[0] C2VR[1] C2VR[0] C1VR[1] C1VR[0]
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved MVR[1] MVR[0]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Extra volume resolution allows fine volume tuning by steps of 0.125 dB.
The feature is enabled when VRESEN=1, as depicted in Figure 43. The overall channel
volume in this case will be CxVol+CxVR (in dB), while the master volume will be
MVOL+MVR (in dB).

Figure 43. Extra resolution volume scheme


Audio Data In

CxVOL Soft
Volume 0
Audio Data Out
X

X 1

VRESEN

1 0

VRESTG
MVOL or CxVOL’event

CxVR

If VRESEN = 0 the channel volume will be defined only by the CxVol registers.
Fine tuning steps can be set according to the following table for channels 1, 2,3, and master
volume.

Table 157. Volume fine-tuning steps


CxVR/MVR Mode

00 0 dB
01 -0.125 dB
10 -0.25 dB
11 -0.375 dB

DocID024543 Rev 1 143/162


Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility STA380BW

Two different behaviors can be configured by the VRESTG bit.


If VRESTG=’0’ the CxVR contribution will be applied immediately after the corresponding
I2C bits are written.
If VRESTG=’1’ the CxVR bits will be effective on channel volume only after the
corresponding CxVol register or master volume register is written (even to the previous
values).

Table 158. Extra volume resolution enable


VRESEN VRESTG Mode

0 0 Extra volume resolution disabled


0 1 Extra volume resolution disabled
1 0 Fine volume tuning enabled and applied immediately
Fine volume tuning enabled and applied when master or
1 1
channel volume is updated

7.19 PLL configuration registers (address 0x41; 0x42; 0x43; 0x44;


0x45; 0X46)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
PLL_FRAC[15:8]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
PLL_FRAC[7:0]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
PLL_DITH[1:0] PLL_NDIV[5:0]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
PLL_DPD PLL_FCT PLL_STB PLL_STBBYP PLL_IDIV(3:0)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Reserved Reserved PLL_DIRP PLL_PWD PLL_BYP OSC_PD Reserved BOOST32K
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved BYPSTATE PDSTATE OSCOK LOWCK
NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

By default the STA380BW is able to configure the embedded PLL automatically depending
on the MCS bits (reg 0x00). For certain applications and to provide flexibility to the user, a
manual PLL configuration can be used (setting PLL_DIRP to ‘1’).

144/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility

The output PLL frequency formula is:


 NDIV  FRAC
Fin   --------------------------- +  ----------------- 
  IDIV + 1   65536  
where Fin is the input clock frequency from the pad.

Table 159. PLL factors


PLL parameter Min Max

FRAC 0 65535
IDIV 0 3
NDIV 5 55

Table 160. PLL register 0x43 bits


Bit R/W RST Name Description
7 R/W 0 ‘00’: PLL clock dithering disabled
‘01’: PLL clock dithering enabled (triangular))
PLL_DITH(1:0)
6 R/W 0 ‘10’: PLL clock dithering enabled (rectangular)
‘11’: Reserved
5 R/W 0
4 R/W 0
3 R/W 0
NDIV PLL loop divider
2 R/W 0
1 R/W 0
0 R/W 0

Table 161. PLL register 0x44 bits


Bit R/W RST Name Description
‘0’: any PLL dividers change is implemented via PLL
power-down
7 R/W 0 PLL_DPD
‘1’: PLL divider change will happen without PLL
power-down
‘0’: PLL use integer ratio
6 R/W 0 PLL_FCT
‘1’: PLL use fractional ratio
5 R/W 0 PLL_STB PLL synchronous divider changes strobe
‘0’: PLL_STB is active
4 R/W 0 PLL_STBBYP
‘1’: PLL_STB control is bypassed
3 R/W 0
2 R/W 0
PLL_IDIV (3:0) Input PLL divider
1 R/W 0
0 R/W 0

DocID024543 Rev 1 145/162


Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility STA380BW

Table 162. PLL register 0x45 bits


Bit R/W RST Name Description

‘0’: PLL configuration is determined by MCS bits


5 R/W 0 PLL_DIRP ‘1’: PLL configuration is determined by FRAC, IDIV
and NDIV
‘0’: PLL normal behavior
4 R/W 0 PLL_PWD
‘1’: PLL is in power-down mode
‘0’: sys clock is from PLL
3 R/W 0 PLL_BYP
‘1’: sys clock is from external pin (PLL is bypassed)
‘0’: Normal behavior
2 R/W 0 OSC_PD
‘1’: Internal oscillator is in power-down
‘0’: Input oversampling selected by IR bits
0 R/W 0 BOOST32K
‘1’: Input oversampling is selected x3

Table 163. PLL register 0x46 bits


Bit R/W RST Name Description

3 R BYPSTATE PLL bypass state


2 R PDSTATE PLL PD state
1 R OSCOK OSCI locked
0 R LOWCK Clock input frequency check

7.20 Short-circuit protection mode registers SHOK (address 0x47)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved GNDSH VCCSH OUTSH
NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

The following power bridge pins short-circuit protections are implemented in the
STA380BW:
 OUTxx vs GNDx
 OUTxx vs VCCx
 OUT1B vs OUT2A
The protection is enabled when reg. 0x4C bit 0 (SHEN) is set to ‘1’. The protection will
check the short-circuit when the EAPD bit is toggled from ‘0’ to ‘1’ (i.e. the power bridge is
switched on), and only if the test passes (no short) does the power bridge leave the tristate
condition.
Register 0x47 (read-only registers) will give more information about the detected short type.
GNDSH equal to ‘0’ means that OUTxx is shorted to ground, while the same value on
VCCSH means that OUTxx is shorted to Vcc, finally OUTSH=’0’ means that OUT1B is
shorted to OUT2A.

146/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility

To be noted that once the check is performed, and the tristate released, the short protection
is not active anymore until the next EAPD 0->1 toggling which means that shorts that
happened during normal operation cannot be detected.
To be noted that register 0x47 is meaningful only after the EAPD bit is set to ‘1’ at least
once.
The short-circuit protections implemented are effective only in BTL configuration, and they
must not be activated if a single ended-application scheme is needed.

Figure 44. Short-circuit detection timing diagram (no short detected)

Sta r t g n d te s t Sta r t v c c te s t Start o ut test En d o f Sh o r t te s t

EAPD

OUT1A

OUT1B

OUT2A

OUT2B

SHOK1[7:4]

SHOK1[3:0]

SHOK2[0]
50005 cycles TBD cycles
44 50005 cycles
1cycle
cycles

In Figure 44 the short protection timing diagram is shown. The time information is expressed
in clock cycles, where the clock frequency is defined as in section 7.1.1. The gray color is
used for the SHOKx bits to indicate that the bits are carrying the status of the previous
EAPD 0->1 toggling (to be noted that after reset this state is meaningless since no EAPD
transition occurs). GND-related SHOK bits are updated as soon as the gnd test is
completed, VCC bits are updated after the vcc test is completed, and the SOUT bit is
updated after the shorted output test is completed. The gnd test, vcc test and output test are
always run (if the SHEN bit active and EAPD is toggled to ‘1’), and only if both tests are
successful (no short) do the bridge outputs leave the tristate (indicated by dotted lines in the
figure). If one of the three tests (or all) fail, the power bridge outputs are kept in tristate until
the procedure is restarted with a new EAPD toggling.
In this figure EAPD is intended to be bit 7 of register 0x05.

DocID024543 Rev 1 147/162


Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility STA380BW

7.21 Extended coefficient range up to -4...4 (address 0x49, 0x4A)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
CEXT_B4[1] CEXT_B4[0] CEXT_B3[1] CEXT_B3[0] CEXT_B2[1] CEXT_B2[0] CEXT_B1[1] CEXT_B1[0]
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
reserved reserved CEXT_B7[1] CEXT_B7[0] CEXT_B6[1] CEXT_B6[0] CEXT_B51] CEXT_B5[0]
0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

Biquads from 1 to 7 have in the STA380BW the possibility to extend the coefficient range
from [-1,1) to [-4..4) which allows the implementation of high-shelf filters that may require a
coefficient dynamic greater in absolute value than 1.
Three ranges are available, [-1;1) [-2;2) [-4;4). By default, the extended range is activated
Each biquad has its independent setting according to the following table.

Table 164. Coefficients extended range configuration


CEXT_Bx[1] CEXT_Bx[0] Range

0 0 [-1;1)

0 1 [-2;2)

1 0 [-4;4)

1 1 Reserved

In this case the user can decide, for each filter stage, the right coefficients range. Note that
for a given biquad, the same range will be applied to the left and right (channel 1 and
channel 2).
Crossover biquad does not have the availability of this feature, maintaining the [-1;1) range
unchanged.

7.22 Miscellaneous registers (address 0x4B, 0x4C)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
RPDNEN BRIDGOFF CPWMEN reserved
0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
LPDP LPD LPDE PNDLSL[2] PNDLSL[1] PNDLSL[0] reserved SHEN
0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0

7.22.1 Rate power-down enable (RPDNEN) bit (address 0x4B, bit D7)
In the STA380BW, by default, the power-down pin and I2C power-down act on mute
commands to perform the fade-out. This default can be changed so that the fade-out can be
started using master volume. The RPDNEN bit, when set, activates this feature.

148/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility

7.22.2 Bridge immediately off (BRIDGOFF) bit (address 0x4B, bit D5)
A fade-out procedure is started in the STA380BW once the PWDN function is enabled, and
after 13 million clock cycles (PLL internal frequency) the bridge is put in power-down
(tristate mode). There is also the possibility to change this behavior so that the power bridge
will be switched off immediately after the PWDN pin is tied to ground, without waiting for the
13 million clock cycles. The BRIDGOFF bit, when set, activates this function. Obviously the
immediate power-down will generate a pop noise at the output, therefore this procedure
must be used only in case pop noise is not relevant in the application. Note that this feature
works only for hardware PWDN assertion and not for a power-down applied through the IIC
interface. Refer to Section 7.22.5 if programming a different number of clock cycles is
needed.

7.22.3 Channel PWM enable (CPWMEN) bit (address 0x4B, bit D2)
This bit, when set, activates a mute output in case the volume reaches a value lower
than -76 dBFS.

7.22.4 External amplifier hardware pin enabler (LPDP, LPD LPDE) bits
(address 0x4C, bit D7, D6, D5)
Pin 42 (INTLINE), normally indicating a fault condition, using the following 3 register
settings, can be reconfigured as hardware pin enabler for an external headphone or line
amplifier.
In particular the LPDE bit, when set, activates this function. Accordingly, the LPD value (0 or
1) is exported on pin 42 and in case of power-down assertion, pin 42 is tied to LPDP.
The LPDP bit, when set, negates the value programmed as the LPD value, refer to the
following table.

Table 165. External amplifier enabler configuration bits


LPDP LPD LPDE Pin 42 output

x x 0 INT_LINE

0 0 1 0

0 1 1 1

1 0 1 1

1 1 1 0

DocID024543 Rev 1 149/162


Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility STA380BW

Figure 45. Alternate function for INTLINE pin


Po w er B rid ge Fau lt

0
‘0 ’ Y 0 IN T L IN E

1
LPD N 1

LPD E
“is the d evice in p ow erd o w n ?” LP D P

7.22.5 Power-down delay selector (PNDLSL[2:0]) bits (address 0x4C, bit D4,
D3, D2)
As per Section 7.22.2, the assertion of PWDN activates a counter that, by default, after 13
million clock cycles puts the power bridge in tristate mode, independently from the fade-out
time. Using these registers it is possible to program this counter according to the following
table.

Table 166. PNDLSL bits configuration


PNDLSL[2] PNDLSL[1] PNDLSL[2] Fade-out time

0 0 0 Default time (13M PLL clock cycles)

0 0 1 Default time divided by 2

0 1 0 Default time divided by 4

0 1 1 Default time divided by 8

1 0 0 Default time divided by 16

1 0 1 Default time divided by 32

1 1 0 Default time divided by 64

1 1 1 Default time divided by 128

7.22.6 Short-circuit check enable bit (address 0x4C, bit D0)


This bit, when enabled, will activate the short-circuit checks before any power bridge
activation (EAPD bit 0->1). See section 7.20 for more details.

150/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility

7.23 Bad PWM detection registers (address 0x4D, 0x4E, 0x4F)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
BPTH[5] BPTH[4] BPTH[3] BPTH[2] BPTH[1] BPTH[0] reserved reserved
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
BP4B BP4A BP3B BP3A BP2B BP2A BP1B BP1A
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
BPTIM[7] BPTIM[6] BPTIM[5] BPTIM[4] BPTIM[3] BPTIM[2] BPTIM[1] BPTIM[0]
0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0

The STA380BW implements a detection on the PWM outputs able to verify if the output
signal has no zero-crossing in a configurable time window. This check can be useful to
detect DC levels in the PWM outputs. To be noted that the checks are performed on logic
level PWM (i.e. not the power bridge ones, nor the PWM on ))X3 and ))X4 I/Os).
In case of ternary modulation, the detection threshold is computed as:
TH=[(BPTH*2+1)/128]*100%
If the measured PWM duty cycle is detected greater than or equal to TH for more than
BPTIM PWM periods, the corresponding PWM bit will be set in register 0x4E.
In case of binary modulation, there are two thresholds:
TH1=[(64+BPTH)/128]*100%
TH2=[(64-BPTH)/128]*100%
In this case if the measured PWM duty cycle is outside the TH1-TH2 range for more than
BPTIM PWM periods, the corresponding bit will be set in register 0x4E.

DocID024543 Rev 1 151/162


Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility STA380BW

7.24 Enhanced zero-detect mute and input level measurement


(address 0x50-0x54, 0x2E, 0x2F and 0x5E)
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
WTHH WTHL FINETH HSEL[1:0] ZMTH[2:0]
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
RMS_CH0[7:0]
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
RMS_CH0[15:8]
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
RMS_CH1[7:0]
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
RMS_CH1[15:8]
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

The STA380BW implements an RMS-based zero-detect function (on serial input interface
data) able to detect in a very reliable way the presence of an input signal, so that the power
bridge outputs can be automatically connected to ground.
When active, the function will mute the output PWM when the input level become less than
“threshold - hysteresis”. Once muted, the PWM will be unmuted when the input level is
detected greater than “threshold + hysteresis”.
The measured level is then reported (for each input channel) on registers 0x51 - 0x52, 0x53
- 0x54 according to the following equation:
Value_in_dB = 20*Log10(Reg_value/(216*0.635))

Table 167. Zero-detect threshold


ZMTH[2:0] Equivalent input level (dB)

000 -78
001 -84
010 -90
011 -96
100 -102
101 -108
110 -114
111 -114

152/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility

Table 168. Zero-detect hysteresis


HSEL[1:0] Equivalent input level hysteresis (dB)

00 3
01 4
10 5
11 6

The above thresholds and hysteresis table can be overridden and the low-level threshold
and high-level threshold can be set by the MTH[21:0] bits.
To activate the manual thresholds the FINETH bit has to be set to ‘1’.
To configure the low threshold, the WTHL bit must be set to ‘1’ so that any write operation to
the MTH bits will set the low threshold.
To configure the low threshold, the WTHH bit must be set to ‘1’ so that any write operation to
the MTH bits will set the low threshold.
If the zero-mute block does not detect mute, it will mute the output when the current RMS
value falls below the low threshold.
If the zero-mute block does not detect mute, it will unmute the output when the current RMS
value rises above the high threshold.

Table 169. Manual threshold register 0x2E, 0x2F and 0x5E


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
ReservedT Reserved MTH[21:16]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
MTH[15:8]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
MTH[7:0]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

DocID024543 Rev 1 153/162


Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility STA380BW

7.25 STCompressorTM configuration register (address 0x5A;


0x5B)
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
reserved LIM_BYP STC_BYP STC_ENA reserved NP_CRES reserved NP_CRC-GO
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved STC_LNK BRC_EN
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Table 170. STCompressorTM configuration bits1


Bit R/W RST Name Description

‘0’: STCompressorTM DRC active


6 R/W 0 LIM_BYP
‘1’: STCompressorTM DRC is bypassed
‘0’: STCompressorTM processing activated
5 R/W 1 STC_BYP
‘1’: STCompressorTM is in pass-through
‘0’: STCompressorTM is switched off (no
4 R/W 1 STC_EN configuration is possible in this state)
‘1’: STCompressorTM is enabled
‘1’: CRC STCompressor ok
2 R 0 NP_CRCRES
‘0’: CRC STCompressor error
‘1’: Start CRC STCompressor compute ON
0 R/W 0 NP_CRC_GO
‘0’: Idle

Table 171. STCompressorTM configuration bits 2


Bit R/W RST Name Description

‘0’: Channel 0 and channel 1 attenuation are


applied indepenently
1 R/W 0 STC_LNK ‘1’: Channel 0 and channel 1 attenuation are
linked so that the higher one is applied to both
channel 0 and channel 1
‘1’: STCompressor band recombination enabled
0 R/W 0 BRC_EN
‘0’: Disabled

154/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility

7.26 Coefficient RAM CRC protection (address 0x60-0x6C)


D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
BQCKE[7] BQCKE[6] BQCKE[5] BQCKE[4] BQCKE[3] BQCKE[2] BQCKE[1] BQCKE[0]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
BQCKE[15] BQCKE[14] BQCKE[13] BQCKE[12] BQCKE[11] BQCKE[10] BQCKE[9] BQCKE[8]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
BQCKE[23] BQCKE[22] BQCKE[21] BQCKE[20] BQCKE[19] BQCKE[18] BQCKE[17] BQCKE[16]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
XCCKE[7] XCCKE[6] XCCKE[5] XCCKE[4] XCCKE[3] XCCKE[2] XCCKE[1] XCCKE[0]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
XCCKE[15] XCCKE[14] XCCKE[13] XCCKE[12] XCCKE[11] XCCKE[10] XCCKE[9] XCCKE[8]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
XCCKE[23] XCCKE[22] XCCKE[21] XCCKE[20] XCCKE[19] XCCKE[18] XCCKE[17] XCCKE[16]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
BQCKR[7] BQCKR[6] BQCKR[5] BQCKR[4] BQCKR[3] BQCKR[2] BQCKR[1] BQCKR[0]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
BQCKR[15] BQCKR[14] BQCKR[13] BQCKR[12] BQCKR[11] BQCKR[10] BQCKR[9] BQCKR[8]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
BQCKR[23] BQCKR[22] BQCKR[21] BQCKR[20] BQCKR[19] BQCKR[18] BQCKR[17] BQCKR[16]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
XCCKR[23] XCCKR[22] XCCKR[21] XCCKR[20] XCCKR[19] XCCKR[18] XCCKR[17] XCCKR[16]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
XCCKR[23] XCCKR[22] XCCKR[21] XCCKR[20] XCCKR[19] XCCKR[18] XCCKR[17] XCCKR[16]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
XCCKR[23] XCCKR[22] XCCKR[21] XCCKR[20] XCCKR[19] XCCKR[18] XCCKR[17] XCCKR[16]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
XCAUTO XCRES XCCMP XCGO BCAUTO BCCRES BCCMP BCCGO
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

DocID024543 Rev 1 155/162


Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility STA380BW

The STA380BW implements an automatic CRC computation for the biquad and
MDRC/XOver coefficient memory. Memory cell contents from address 0x00 to 0x27 will be
bit XORed to obtain the BQCHKE checksum, while cells from 0x28 to 0x31 will be XORed to
obtain the XCCHKE checksum. Both checksums (24-bit wide) are exported on I2C registers
from 0x60 to 0x65. The checksum computation will start as soon as the BCGO (for biquad
RAM bank) or the XCGO bit (for MDRC/XOver coefficients) is set to 1. The checksum is
computed at the processing sample rate if the IR bits equal “01” or “10”, otherwise the
checksum is computed to half the processing sample rate.
When BCCMP or XCCMP are set to ‘1’, the relative checksum (BQCHKE and XCCHKE) is
continuously compared with BQCHKR and XCCHKR respectively. If the checksum matches
its own reference value, the respective result bits (BCRES and XCRES) will be set to ‘0’.
The compare bits have no effect if the respective GO bit is not set.
In case of checksum errors (i.e. the internally computed didn’t match the reference), an
automatic device reset action can be activated. This function is enabled when the BCAUTO
or XCAUTO bit is set to ‘1’. The automatic reset bits have no effect if the respective compare
bits are not set.
The recommended procedure for the automatic reset activation is the following:
 Download the set of coefficients (RAM locations 0x00…0x27)
 Download the externally computed biquad checksum into registers BQCHKR
 Enable the checksum of the biquad coefficients by setting the BCGO bit. The
checksum will start to be automatically computed by the STA380BW and its value
exposed on registers BQCHECKE. The checksum value is computed and updated.
 Enable the checksum comparison by setting the BCCMP bit. The internally computed
checksum will start to be compared with the reference one and the result will be
exposed on the BCRES bit. The following operation will be executed on each audio
frame:
if ((BQCHKE == BQCHKR))
{
BC_RES = 0;// Checksum is ok, reset the error bit
}
else
{
BC_RES = 1;// Checksum error detected, set the error bit
}
 Wait until the BCRES bit goes to 0, meaning that the checksum result bit has started to
be updated and everything is ok. Time-out of this operation (e.g. > 1 ms) will indicate
checksum failure, and the MCU will handle this event.
 Enable automatic reset of the device in case of checksum error by setting the BCAUTO
bit. The BCRES bit will then be automatically checked by the STA380BW, on each
audio frame, and the reset event will be triggered in case of checksum mismatch.
 Periodically check the BC_RES status. A value of 1 indicates that a checksum
mismatch has occurred and, therefore, the device went through a reset cycle.
The previous example is intended for biquad CRC bank calculation, but it can be easily
extended to MDRC/XOver CRC computation.

156/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Register description: Sound Terminal compatibility

7.27 MISC3 (address 0x6E)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved SRESET reserved reserved
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Table 172. Misc register 3


Bit R/W RST Name Description

‘0’: normal operation


2 R/W 0 SRESET
‘1’: reset the device

After SRESET is written, the last IC acknowledge is skipped and the EAPD bit (reg 0x16 bit
D7) is set to1 instead of the 0 default value obtained after the hardware reset.

7.28 MISC4 (address 0x7E)

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
SMAP reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Table 173. MISC4


Bit R/W RST Name Description

‘1’: NEWMAP
7 1 SMAP
‘0’: STMAP

DocID024543 Rev 1 157/162


Applications STA380BW

8 Applications

8.1 Typical output configuration


Figure 46 illustrates the typical output configuration used for BTL stereo mode. Please refer
to the application note for all the other schematics for the recommended output
configuration.

Figure 46. Output configuration for stereo BTL mode in filterlight configuration

Note: For further information, please refer to application note AN3959, 2.0-channel demonstration
board based on the STA381BW and STA381BWS.

158/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Package information

9 Package information

In order to meet environmental requirements, ST offers these devices in different grades of


ECOPACK® packages, depending on their level of environmental compliance. ECOPACK®
specifications, grade definitions and product status are available at: www.st.com.
ECOPACK® is an ST trademark.

Figure 47. VQFN48 (7 x 7 x 0.9 mm) package outline

8320060_wk

DocID024543 Rev 1 159/162


Package information STA380BW

Table 174. VQFN48 (7 x 7 x 0.9 mm) package dimensions


mm
Reference
Min. Typ. Max

A 0.80 0.90 1.00


A1 0 0.05
D 6.90 7.00 7.10
D2 5.65 5.70 5.75
E 6.90 7.00 7.10
E2 5.65 5.70 5.75
b 0.25 0.30 0.35
b1 0.20 0.25 0.30
e (pad pitch) 0.50
L1 0.05 0.15
aaa 0.15
bbb 0.10
ddd 0.05
eee 0.08
fff 0.10
ccc 0.10

160/162 DocID024543 Rev 1


STA380BW Revision history

10 Revision history

Table 175. Document revision history


Date Revision Changes

15-Apr-2013 1 Initial release

DocID024543 Rev 1 161/162


STA380BW

Please Read Carefully:

Information in this document is provided solely in connection with ST products. STMicroelectronics NV and its subsidiaries (“ST”) reserve the
right to make changes, corrections, modifications or improvements, to this document, and the products and services described herein at any
time, without notice.
All ST products are sold pursuant to ST’s terms and conditions of sale.
Purchasers are solely responsible for the choice, selection and use of the ST products and services described herein, and ST assumes no
liability whatsoever relating to the choice, selection or use of the ST products and services described herein.
No license, express or implied, by estoppel or otherwise, to any intellectual property rights is granted under this document. If any part of this
document refers to any third party products or services it shall not be deemed a license grant by ST for the use of such third party products
or services, or any intellectual property contained therein or considered as a warranty covering the use in any manner whatsoever of such
third party products or services or any intellectual property contained therein.

UNLESS OTHERWISE SET FORTH IN ST’S TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE ST DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTY WITH RESPECT TO THE USE AND/OR SALE OF ST PRODUCTS INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE (AND THEIR EQUIVALENTS UNDER THE LAWS
OF ANY JURISDICTION), OR INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT, COPYRIGHT OR OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHT.
ST PRODUCTS ARE NOT AUTHORIZED FOR USE IN WEAPONS. NOR ARE ST PRODUCTS DESIGNED OR AUTHORIZED FOR USE
IN: (A) SAFETY CRITICAL APPLICATIONS SUCH AS LIFE SUPPORTING, ACTIVE IMPLANTED DEVICES OR SYSTEMS WITH
PRODUCT FUNCTIONAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS; (B) AERONAUTIC APPLICATIONS; (C) AUTOMOTIVE APPLICATIONS OR
ENVIRONMENTS, AND/OR (D) AEROSPACE APPLICATIONS OR ENVIRONMENTS. WHERE ST PRODUCTS ARE NOT DESIGNED
FOR SUCH USE, THE PURCHASER SHALL USE PRODUCTS AT PURCHASER’S SOLE RISK, EVEN IF ST HAS BEEN INFORMED IN
WRITING OF SUCH USAGE, UNLESS A PRODUCT IS EXPRESSLY DESIGNATED BY ST AS BEING INTENDED FOR “AUTOMOTIVE,
AUTOMOTIVE SAFETY OR MEDICAL” INDUSTRY DOMAINS ACCORDING TO ST PRODUCT DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS.
PRODUCTS FORMALLY ESCC, QML OR JAN QUALIFIED ARE DEEMED SUITABLE FOR USE IN AEROSPACE BY THE
CORRESPONDING GOVERNMENTAL AGENCY.
Resale of ST products with provisions different from the statements and/or technical features set forth in this document shall immediately void
any warranty granted by ST for the ST product or service described herein and shall not create or extend in any manner whatsoever, any
liability of ST.
ST and the ST logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of ST in various countries.
Information in this document supersedes and replaces all information previously supplied.
The ST logo is a registered trademark of STMicroelectronics. All other names are the property of their respective owners.

© 2013 STMicroelectronics - All rights reserved

STMicroelectronics group of companies


Australia - Belgium - Brazil - Canada - China - Czech Republic - Finland - France - Germany - Hong Kong - India - Israel - Italy - Japan -
Malaysia - Malta - Morocco - Philippines - Singapore - Spain - Sweden - Switzerland - United Kingdom - United States of America
www.st.com

162/162 DocID024543 Rev 1

You might also like